EZEKIEL

 

and YHWH’s

 

 Judgment

 

 

for the

 

Good News

 

PEOPLE

 

 

 

VOLUME XXXII

 

Prophetic Events

 

 

EZEKIEL and YHWH’s

 

 

Judgment for the

 

 

 Good News People

 

 

 

 

Volume XXXII--Prophetic Events

 

 

 

 

 

by

 

an unworthy servant

 

 

 

 

 

 

And you shall know the truth,

 

and the truth will make you free.

 

(John 8:32)

 

 

Common Law Copyright, 2003 & 2005 CE, an unworthy servant, Calder, Idaho.  The author claims his Right of exclusive ownership and control of this publication, the fruit of his labor, as a matter of Intellectual Property protected by the Laws of YHWH and as guaranteed by the US Constitution for the United States.  Permission is granted to quote provided appropriate credit is cited together with the Publisher’s web site name and postal mailing address––WWW.age-end.com PO Box 473, Calder, ID 83808, USA. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contents

 

 

 

Volume XXXII--Prophetic Events 

 

 

CHAPTER                                                                              PAGE

 

 

      -                  Cover Page                                                                                                         1

 

      -                  Title Page                                                                                                             2

 

      -                  Contents                                                                                                              3

 

      -                  Publisher’s Preface                                                                                           5

 

 

Part XXXX--Trouble for Yisrael 

 

      506             The End of Yisrael’s Rebellion                                                                        6

 

      507             Trouble Unfolds on Yisrael                                                                            12

 

      508             The Trouble Intensifies for Yisrael                                                                17

 

      509             More Trouble for Yisrael                                                                                  29

 

      510             Nuclear War                                                                                                      41

 

      511             Still More Trouble                                                                                             51

 

      512             And More Tests and Trials                                                                              64

 

 

Part YYYY--More Trouble for Yisrael 

 

      513             Countdown to the End                                                                                    70

 

      514             Temple Developments I                                                                                  80

 

      515             Temple Developments II                                                                                 90

 

      516             Temple Developments III                                                                                95

 

      517             Temple Developments IV                                                                              104

 

      518             YESHUA Returns                                                                                          110

 

      519             The Jews and The Coming MESSIAH                                                       115

 

      520             After YESHUA Returns                                                                                 119

 

 

Part ZZZZ--Duality 

 

      521             Duality in the Age End I                                                                                126

 

      522             Duality in the Age End II                                                                               138

 

      523             Duality in the Age End III                                                                              146

 

      524             Duality in the Age End IV                                                                             153

 

      525             Duality in the Age End V                                                                              158

SHEERIT YISRAEL

PO Box 473

Calder, Idaho 83808, USA

 

 

Publisher’s Preface

 

Greetings!  The following presentation is volume thirty-two of a 36-volume production of some 6,000 pages on “Ezekiel and YHWH’s Judgment for the Good News People,” all of which is on the Internet at the www.age-end.com web site. 

 

This overall effort provides an interpretation of the Good News message in the New Testament, its linkage to the book of Ezekiel, and an application of both to the age-end prophecies relating to certain nations and peoples now out in the world.  In order for this single volume to be understood and comprehended, it is imperative that the study be read from its beginning--from page one of volume one. 

 

Anyone trying to read this volume or the study’s 6,000 pages at any mid-point will end up in a state of confusion without having read and digested the preceding material.  It is crucially important that this work be read in sequence from its beginning--otherwise, the reader will almost certainly end up missing the essence of the message! 

 

The effort was originally set on a Macintosh computer with Microsoft Word 6.0.1.  It was set in Helvetica, 12-point type (18 pt on chapter headings); single line spacings; and margins:  left 1.2”, right 0.8”, top 0.7”, bottom 0.8” and footer 0.6” (for page numbers). 

 

For further information on obtaining this study in 18 computer floppy disks (IBM-formatted, high density, 2HD, 1.44 MB, 3 1/2 inches); in a single CD-Rom; or in hard copies (when the Internet or a compatible computer is not available); please write the publisher at the above address and send a stamped, self-addressed, long (legal-size), return envelope. 

 

With a CD-Rom or computer floppy disks, the study is readable on Macintosh (systems 5.0 and later) or IBM/compatible (with Microsoft Word-Windows) personal computers.  May The Great CREATOR and SOVEREIGN OF THE UNIVERSE bless you as you study His word to learn His will and to obey Him.  Shalom (peace) to you and yours! 

 

an unworthy servant, Hanukkah 2003 CE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 506--The End of Yisrael’s Rebellion

 

 

The Prophetic Future 

 

Throughout this production, mention has been made from time to time of some facets of man’s (and especially Yisrael’s) immediate prophetic future.  Previous chapters, in particular, mention the several great age ending events or signs that are now falling into place which will affect all of so-called humanity for all of history. 

 

While some of these references are informing, they are quite scattered and may still not have much meaning at this point in time.  They have not been arranged into any real sequence of events as is necessary for comprehension. 

 

These next few chapters (and a later Appendix E) will bring these several remarks together in some sequence or order and along with some of the relevant Scriptures which might can give the student of truth a better overview of where the House of Yisrael “possibly” stands at this moment in time. 

 

The word “possibly” has been purposely used here because the subject of prophecy is extremely complex and interpretation is not always easy.  Hence, the following presentation represents the attempts of this writer to interpret the prophetic Word and apply it to the present world situation.  Of course, it can be wrong.  But it is the current thinking of this writer. 

 

 

Background 

 

Thus, there is a need here to mention the backdrop for the present world situation, as outlined in the previous chapters.  For sure, man is approaching the age end.  The entire, present system is about to abort and terminate.  There can be no mistaking what is taking place in this regard.  There are a huge number of signs which say that the age end is upon man. 

 

A preceding chapter described the present Prophetic Overview which illustrates that a whole series of events are coming together to usher in the great Messianic age and Kingdom, as described in the Book.  Yes, everything now taking place in the world merely represents a prelude to the establishment of YHWH’s Kingdom. 

 

This is a profound and extraordinary future which all believers anxiously and patiently have hoped for over many years.  Even the famous model prayer stated by YESHUA includes a petition and plea for this Kingdom to come. 

 

It is not difficult for the believer to come to a realization that man (to include any type of a man--Adamite, behemah, chiayah, nokri/nekar or whatever) is utterly and totally incapable of governing his paths.  We simply don’t have it in our present mentality or make-up to govern ourselves.  We need YHWH YESHUA and His government in order to exist and survive. 

 

Hence, the time for this coming government and Kingdom of YHWH YESHUA now seems evident upon us.  As discussed in the above cited, previous chapter on Prophetic Overview, the signs are now in place. 

 

Once this marvelous and supernatural Kingdom and government comes over earth, it will usher in the Messianic age, whereby YESHUA will rule the earth for a thousand years.  Yes, YESHUA will be crowned King over the earth and all of its inhabitants.  He will take an already established throne which will prove to be most spectacular when the event takes place (to be discussed below). 

 

YESHUA will set things right in the creation.  For sure, one of the most important events that will transpire with the Messianic Kingdom is that there will be an end to sin.  Sin has been judged wrong and it will not survive. 

 

 

Yes, the End of Sin in Yisrael   

 

Some of the former presentations herein made mention of a coming New Covenant that The MOST HIGH will make with the House of Yisrael, whereby she will be cleaned up from her harlotry and whoredom to allow A Righteous YHWH YESHUA to enter into a new (or correctly a renewed) marriage contract with her. 

 

In effect, Yisrael must stop sinning.  And by the coming New Covenant, she will stop sinning.  Now, this idea on stopping sin is fairly foreign in Christendom’s eyes.  Moreover, Christians have convinced the public at large that it is impossible to not sin. 

 

Hence, per their theology, even Christians are expected to sin.  But they don’t have anything to worry about since their sweet Gee-Zeus automatically forgives them whenever they sin.  Consequently, when the average Christian stood up and said some meaningless words about “belief” and/or was baptized in an unscriptural ceremony, he not only gained forgiveness for all past sins, but all future sins as well. 

 

This permissiveness and lack of accountability and responsibility have extended to almost all facets of the modern, contemporary society.  Parents allow children to get away with almost all kinds of things.  Whippings and disciplining of children are virtually out of the question, as was discussed in previous chapters. 

 

Of course, this permissiveness has spilled over into adult lives, so much so, that even grown people are not responsible.  Naturally, crime is exploding and no one seems to know why.  The collective population is growing more and more irresponsible and careless toward standards, morality and righteousness.  A man’s word is no longer his bond. 

 

So Christians allow or in some instances teach their people to sin (when they teach against YHWH’s Torah that defines sin).  But under the New Covenant, be assured that this sinning must stop.  It’s not in The ELOHIM’s purpose to allow His election and saved people the option of continuing in sin with a bliss that they don’t have anything to worry about. 

 

Since Yisrael is the subject of the New/Renewed Covenant, be assured that she must learn some new thinking.  And this is precisely what will happen to the House of Yisrael and her peoples.  Sin must and will stop.  The prospect of this new thinking (of stopping sin) and the related New/Renewed Covenant will now be pursued with a focus on events of the age end, because the topics are related. 

 

Thus, the immediate prophetic future for the House of Yisrael (in the context of the seven years of Yakov’s Trouble) will act in helping the House of Yisrael to commence doing something which she has never done in her past history of some 3,800 years.  She has never obeyed The ETERNAL.  But He will bring about conditions here in the age end to force her to start obeying and stop sinning! 

 

 

Material on the Millennium 

 

And for this future, there seems to be an abundance of prophetic material relating to the millennium; and of course, Yisrael, both in this age end and in the millennium.  While the purpose of this study is not to examine the millennium, per se, a few remarks will be made to facilitate the presentation of a discussion on the role of the House of Yisrael during the next “few” years preceding the termination of this age. 

 

Over the last 150 years or so, some persons in Christendom (primarily, because of the work of the Age to Come Adventists in the 1850s) have come to appreciate that during the millennium YESHUA will be KING over planet earth with His throne to be established on Mount Moriah in Jerusalem--apparently, in the coming millennial Temple (Ezek 40-44). 

 

While most Christians can never begin to grasp this fact of YESHUA’s millennial rule of planet earth, with its basic population consisting of fleshly humans/humanoids, it is the backbone of Scriptural prophecy.  Everything in the now pending age end is for the express purpose of ushering in this Messianic age. 

 

Too much of Christendom has been taught the fairy tales and vain speculations of going to heaven to float around on clouds forever.  For sure, the earth is the planned immediate future for man (Matt 5:5). 

 

Therefore, YHWH YESHUA returns to earth to become The KING over an earth mostly made up (at least initially) of fleshly humans/humanoids of various nations--perhaps much like one finds in the world today (Rev 19:15-16).  And this fact is one of the reasons why a millennial Temple will be built on Mount Moriah and the sacrifice of animals will resume (Ezek 40-45). 

 

Of course, the world’s population will be dramatically decreased by at least 90% or likely even more of today’s 6 billion or so people, apparently by the start of YESHUA’s millennial rule.  The several judgments in Revelation and particularly the second (mass) death will see the death of billions of humans (Rev 20:6). 

 

Beyond the fleshly humans/humanoids, who will survive, there surely will be the previously described 301,775 kingdom officials from YHWH’s elections of the past 6,000 years (plus, probably a similar number of changed women).  These translated men will be kings and priests, under YESHUA, to help Him carry out His authoritarian rule of planet earth. 

 

Rebellion toward The ELOHIM’s Torah will categorically end during the millennium.  Humans/humanoids, in the flesh, will be made to start obeying things that they have historically ignored, ridiculed and made light of for the past 6,000 years.  The creation will come into harmony with YHWH’s will and purpose during the millennium. 

 

 

The Throne 

 

Previous chapters have discussed the movement of the throne of David from out of the Middle East to the British Isles where it has remained with the line of David until modern times.  This background then opens the door to a fantastic revelation. 

 

Unbeknown to a lot of people, YHWH YESHUA comes to earth to take possession of His rightful throne; which, interestingly, is present on planet earth this day and has been here for the past 3,000 years since it was first established with David in ancient Yisrael (Lu 1:32-33).  The point here has been made in those previous comments. 

 

In the establishment of the Davidic kingdom, The HIGHEST made a number of unconditional and irrevocable promises to David (as quoted in a prior chapter)--specifically, that a descendant of his would always sit upon that physical throne in rulership over Israelites (II Sam 7:12-16; I Kg 2:4; 9:4-5; 11:11-13; II Kg 19:32-36; I Chron 17:11-15; 22:9; 28:4-5; II Chron 7:18; 13:5; Ps 89:20-37; Jer 33:17, 20). 

 

As described in former comments, these promises by YHWH were so profound that they extended beyond pledges made by mortal men.  The ELOHIM went so far as to assert that as long as there are days, nights, seasons, and the ordinances regulating the signs in the heavens, His pledge to David, of the perpetual nature of his throne and his heirs sitting upon it, could not be and would not be broken (Jer 33:20, 21, 25, 26). 

 

Consequently, did Nebuchadnezzar’s conquest of Jerusalem, in the 6th century BCE, break YHWH’s promise to David?  Positively not!  After all, any one capable of seeing the sun and moon in the heavens, can look and verify their continued presence.  Assuredly, David’s throne is still on earth somewhere today in rulership over Israelites (as discussed earlier).  That promise could not and would not be broken. 

 

 

Koniyahu, Revisited 

 

Just before the final Babylonian conquests, some things were to happen in the line of Davidic rule which would ultimately prove to be most important.  The legal line went from Yoshiyahu to his son Yehoyakim, and then to Yehoyakim’s son Yehoyakhin (Jeconiah [Yekhanyahu in the Hebrew] or Koniyahu, who was removed to Babylonian exile by Nebuchadnezzar). 

 

At that time, Tzidkiyahu, the brother of Yehoyakim, was questionably installed on the throne by the Babylonians (although apparently, with YAH’s allowance). 

 

The rightful heir, Koniyahu, had sons named Shealtiel and Pedayah (as discussed earlier, both born in Palestine or in Babylon).  Shealtiel (or Pedayah, as the case may be) was to become the legal ancestor of The Man YESHUA, born some 500 years later. 

 

Because of his vast sins, The MOST HIGH placed a curse on Koniyahu that would not allow him or his descendants to sit on David’s throne, though they were otherwise entitled to it (Jer 22:24-30). 

 

However, YHWH’s law declares that children are not to be punished for the sins of their parents beyond the third/fourth generations (Ex 20:5).  So this curse must have ended in Babylon or shortly thereafter.  It was not perpetual and there was a clear end to it according to YAH’s Own law. 

 

So while Koniyahu and his son Shealtiel (or Pedayah) could not have the throne, some of their later descendants could possess it--possibly by the time of or not long after Koniyahu’s grandson Zerubavel (a double ancestor of YESHUA--Matt 1:12; Lu 3:27, as noted previously on YESHUA’s genealogy), who was to later rule as Governor over the Israelites in the return from Babylon (Ezra 3:1-2; Hag 2:20-21). 

 

 

It Will Return to Its Owner 

 

Not only could this line of Koniyahu eventually possess the throne, but it was legally entitled to it.  The takeover by Tzidkiyahu meant that his line was not the rightful and legal heirs of the throne.  At best, they were only granted a temporary possession of it until it could be properly returned to the line of Koniyahu in a future time frame. 

 

This reversion of the throne back to its rightful owner was alluded to by the prophet Haggai (Hag 2:21-23).  But with Yirmeyahu’s help, after the fall of Jerusalem, the line of Tzidkiyahu (with the throne) was to prosper in their new land (after leaving Palestine) and they have perpetually ruled over portions of the House of Yisrael for the last 2,500 years. 

 

From the place of its initial displacement, the throne has moved a few times and very soon, it must be overturned and moved at least one more time--back to Palestine; where, in time, it will be placed with its rightful heir, YESHUA, in the midst of a restored Davidic kingdom in Yisrael (Ezek 21:26-27). 

 

A previous chapter focused on the several movements of the throne (in the context of Yakov’s Pillar Stone) and the likelihood that the age end will see some three more movements.  Importantly, Ezekiel 21:27 seems to suggest that the time will be reached where it will be certainly vacant when YESHUA returns to take possession of it. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 507--Trouble Unfolds on Yisrael

 

 

 Yechezkel, Revisited 

 

In terms of the immediate future for the House of Yisrael (from the present to the commencement of the millennium), the book of Ezekiel is perhaps the single, best source of information in existence, as discussed in former chapters.  Without repeating the previous remarks, some points need to be recalled with some added interpretations. 

 

There are a series of dates in Ezekiel which are extremely important, if one can but interpret them correctly.  The book opens with the prophet’s vision or visit on the fifth day of the fourth month of the fifth year of Koniyahu’s captivity (which also seems to be the 30th year, assuredly of some cycle, as described in former chapters herein-- Ezek 1:1-2).  

 

Something around 7-12 days or so was to pass before Yechezkel moved to his house to begin his trial, possibly while being tied up and laying down on his sides.  If both Yehudah and Yisrael were involved, he accomplished this effort (or completed the vision, if it was a vision) in the next 430 (390 + 40) days, which was to end by the fifth day of the sixth month of the sixth year of Koniyahu’s captivity (Ezek 4:5-6; 8:1). 

 

Now, according to the Scriptural luni-solar calendar, this suggested 430 days would have had to involve an intercalcary year of thirteen moons in order to work out with the established dates.  This interesting chronological time period also goes to disprove the validity of the solar calendar used by the Essenes and modern groups as well. 

 

There is no way that any solar calendar (365 days, with twelve months in a year) can produce this 430 days from between the twelfth-seventeenth days of the fourth month of one year to the fifth day of the sixth month of the next year.  This issue was discussed in some detail in a former chapter and will be further covered in later appendices. 

 

Howbeit, if there is to be an age end witness of Yechezkel, it will seemingly start in the 30th year of some applicable cycle, as described in the prior chapter (although such a witness is not totally necessary since the House of Yisrael peoples have had the work of Yechezkel available to them in the form of the written Scriptures in the vernacular for the last 390 years). 

 

 

The Sign 

 

It appears that Yechezkel beheld the chastisements and punishments, outlined supposedly in the context of Jerusalem (Ezek 4-7).  But as pointed out before, there was one little remark which made the entire event most extraordinary. 

 

YHWH told the prophet Yechezkel that the whole thing (that was to fall upon Jerusalem in the then next seven years) was but a sign for the House of Yisrael (Ezek 4:3).  In short, the terrible pain coming on Jerusalem (coming about five to seven years later) would be a sample of the pain to later come on the House of Yisrael (in a later time frame). 

 

As these words are being written by this writer in early 2003, that time of punishment for the House of Yisrael is still future.  It has never happened in the history of Yisrael, in the past 2,700 years.  Of course, it will.  And the student of truth can determine when it will occur because Yechezkel seems to have dated it.  Significantly, Yechezkel’s prophecies are generally dated, as already noted. 

 

 

Yisrael To Have 390 Years of Sin 

 

But more importantly, Yechezkel indicated that this punishment would come upon the House of Yisrael at the conclusion of a period of 390 years of accountable sin (Ezek 4:5).  Now, there are important periods of 390 years concluding almost every year.  Take, for example, the British colonies in North America (the US and Canada). 

 

They commenced in 1607 at Jamestown (around May 15th in the Julian Calendar, but about Siwan 1 in the Scriptural calendar), making an elapse of 390 years in 1997. 

 

Alternatively, the Jamestown colony was abandoned and revitalized in 1610, making an end of 390 years in 2000.  The KJV of the Book was published in 1611/1612--making a 390 year terminus in 2001/2002 (which is very important, as noted in a prior chapter).  Too, the Pilgrims landed at Plymouth Rock in 1620, making a 390 terminus in 2010. 

 

There seems to be two ways of calculating this 390 years.  In the ante-type example of the 390 years allocated to Yehudah, the 390 years’ count (by progressive counting) started in a year following the initial three years that Rehoboam walked in the ways of David (II Chron 11:17; 12:5).  Thus, the 390 years count started in the fourth year. 

 

This delay meant that Rehoboam faced his first attack from the external power of Egypt in his 5th year (I Kg 14:25; II Chron 12:2).  Thus, the final siege on Yehudah started in her 393d year and ended in her 394th year (from Rehoboam’s first year) or perhaps the siege started in the 394th year and ended in her 395th year (from the division of the kingdom, if the division happened in Shlomo’s last year). 

 

If this analogy holds, it could mean that the final siege of 390 days may start in Yechezkel’s 32d year.  In the context of accountable sin, the 390 years may possibly run in conjunction with the time that the English speaking peoples had the KJV in the vernacular (from 1611-1612, plus three to five years for the grace period).  Alternatively, the count here, on the KJV, may prove to be 400 years (to 2011-2012). 

 

At or near the conclusion of this 390 years of accountable sin, Yisrael gets into some preliminary and initial trouble (possibly, with some trouble surfacing by the 15th day of the 8th month, and more trouble around the 10th day of the 10th month--at some point in time, the trouble involves some multi-national force, like a Russian-Chinese-Islamic-Latin alliance or something similar. 

 

 

The Problem 

 

This trouble on the House of Yisrael nations likely unfolds because of owing vast sums of money to foreign powers (but being unable to pay off those foreign debts) and the many years of Israeli support (which has infuriated the Muslims).  This last issue has the possibility of another twist. 

 

The January-February 2000 “Tzemach Letter” (p. 4) noted that in the recent Arab-Israeli peace talks, the Clinton administration raised the possibility of a US-Israeli defense pact (which would commit the US to go to the aid of Israel in case Israel is attacked).  If such a pact materialized, it could open the door for a Muslim, Russian and Third World decision to move first against the US before striking the Israeli state. 

 

In other words, a defense pact between America and Israel may prompt an alliance of these enemies to choose to move against the US with a plan to later attack the state of Israel.  But regardless of whatever reason, the Word is clear that these enemies do move against the House of Yisrael nations.  YHWH will support the attackers when this happens. 

 

Consequently, the House of Yisrael seems to eventually undergo a temporary economic difficulty (perhaps an embargo around the 10th day of Teveth of Yechezkel’s 31st year), which will quickly subside (perhaps after 40 days or so). 

 

 

The Siege 

 

However, very early thereafter, the trouble will likely resurface again.  Except this time, it will be far more serious and it will not subside.  It charges at Yisrael like an unstoppable freight-train or mad bull elephant, when a foreign siege of some sort develops to last for 390 days. 

 

This siege gets serious when a nuclear attack commences about a year later, to be followed a month later by an invasion and conquest.  This trouble on Yisrael could, in total, follow the pattern established with Yechezkel and Yehudah some 2,558-2,559 years ago (which, in time, covered roughly seven years). 

 

Whenever the final siege starts (probably in Yechezkel’s 32d year), the initial problem could really have started around the 8th to 10th months in the preceding year (likely involving political/economic problems of some sort). 

 

Like the serious trouble on Bul 15th in 2000 (to be described in later remarks), one might expect more serious problems on Bul 15 and Teveth 10 in Yechezkel’s 30th-32d years.  The basis of the 10th of Teveth trouble was noted earlier and will be further discussed later. 

 

Therefore, the 10th of Teveth of Yechezkel’s 31st year could see the first of an economic embargo against Yisrael.  If so, it will probably subside after about 40 days or so (as happened in the initial Babylonian siege against Jerusalem, when the Babylonians temporarily withdrew--Jer 37:5-11) and then resume the next year (in Yechezkel’s 32d year). 

 

The outline of Ezekiel 1-4 would allow that the final siege might start in Yechezkel’s 32d year--as early as Siwan (in a regular year) or the fourth month (in an intercalcary year).  This siege may terminate with an invasion and conquest around the 17th day of the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

Yechezkel started his prophetic work in the 5th year of Yehoyakhin’s captivity.  Jerusalem fell in his 12th year of captivity.  This means that Yechezkel’s initial prophecies covered seven years (by progressive counting) and eight years by inclusive counting and appear to almost dovetail with a similar mark off of seven years in the age end. 

 

 

Jerusalem--a Sign for Yisrael 

 

Yechezkel prophesied first of the fall of Jerusalem as a sign for the fall of the House of Yisrael.  The actual fall of Jerusalem came some seven years later (in Yechezkel’s 37th year).  In the age end, the same sequence will evidently occur, but with one alteration.  The House of Yisrael falls first (perhaps in Yechezkel’s 33d year).  And some four years or so later, Jerusalem falls to the Beast for the final time (in Yechezkel’s 37th year). 

 

Apparently, things will work out that YESHUA returns in Yechezkel’s 37th year which is not dated or cited, per se, in the book of Ezekiel, nor is there a discussion about the return of YESHUA (although the return is implied).  Since Yechezkel was a watchman for the House of Yisrael, his primary focus was only upon what was happening to the Israelite people of the House of Yisrael. 

 

After YESHUA returns, Yechezkel’s first focus on Yisrael happens when YESHUA is recognized as The GOOD SHEPHERD, Who seeks out and recovers His scattered sheep from around the world to return them to Palestine (Ezek 34:10-22).  This recovery probably happens in Yechezkel’s 38th year. 

 

The ante-type in I Maccabees suggests that the recovery takes place in the year following the cleansing of the Temple (I Macc 5:17-23).  Since the primary focus of Yakov’s Trouble probably does not surface until Yechezkel’s 32d-33d year (with the fall of the House of Yisrael nations), it might be that the conclusion of Yakov’s Trouble occurs in Yechezkel’s 39th year (thus, allowing two years for the recovery). 

 

In the ante-type of Yakov’s Trouble, the House of Yehudah’s problems first started on the 10th day of the 10th month of one year (Yechezkel’s 35th year) and quickly subsided (c556 BCE).  The trouble resumed and intensified the next year (c555 BCE).  The kingdom fell in the next year, in c554 BCE (in Yechezkel’s 37th year). 

 

On the basis of actual events associated with Jerusalem, the book of Ezekiel covered about seven years (although there were later prophecies received in the prophet’s 50th year (Ezek 40:1) and in his 52d year (Ezek 29:17). 

 

In the typical fulfillment, the events preceding YESHUA’s return will surely happen in Yechezkel’s 30th-37th years (with Jerusalem falling to the Beast in possibly the fourth month of the 37th year).  Hence, Yechezkel, in both instances, covers about seven years from the beginning of the prophecies until the fall of Jerusalem to the Beast. 

 

 

More on the Ante-Type 

 

In the ante-type with Yehudah, much of the material after the fall of Jerusalem (from Ezekiel 34 and forward) was prophetic with little in the way of actual events in Palestine in Yechezkel’s day.  Manifestly, Ezekiel 34:10 and forward does largely apply to the age end situation, following the return of YESHUA. 

 

Interestingly, in the ante-type, trouble continued upon the Jews in the area for another five or six years, before the last of them were deported (Jer 52:30).  Yehudah had seven years of terror (likewise, Yehudah had seven years of terror in 66-73 CE with the Romans and from 1938 to 1945 with the Nazis), just as the age ending House of Yisrael will have seven years of Yakov’s Trouble (Yechezkel’s 30th-32d to the 37th-39th years). 

 

One can check Yechezkel’s outline (chapters 4-7) of what happens in the 390 days siege and conquest of the House of Yisrael and relate it to the first several seals of the book of Revelation, and more importantly to the curses in YHWH’s law (for disobedience of His Torah), as written by Moshe (Lev 26; Deut 28). 

 

All of this is still future for the House of Yisrael, as these lines are being written in early 2003.  It hasn’t happened yet.  But assuredly, it will! 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 508--The Trouble Intensifies for Yisrael

 

 

Yisrael’s Corrective Punishment 

 

The coming punishment on the House of Yisrael nations and people involves breaking the pride of Yisrael’s power (her monetary system?), a drought, famine, cannibalism, the behemah humanoids going wild (when their welfare checks end--Lev 26:22; Deut 28:5, 26; Ezek 5:17; 14:1-5) to make Yisrael’s highways and byways unsafe for travel or social intercourse, a destruction of Yisrael’s sun worship churches and obelisks, a nuclear war of about 30 days (likely near the end of the siege), and a final invasion when the Israelites do not even go out to fight (Ezek 7:14). 

 

Some 75-90% (or so) of the Israelites will quickly die from the famine, pestilence and war.  Yeshayahu tells of the destruction and death of most persons of the House of Yakov, though they had become like the sands of the seaside (Isa 10:20-23). 

 

After this series of terrifying judgments on the age ending House of Yisrael, the surviving Israelites face an eventual slavery and captivity in the “early summer” of one year and still more deaths later. 

 

The former lands of Yisrael will be divided among the behemah, chaiyah and nokri survivors and the conquerors in payment of Yisrael’s outstanding debts (Ezek 7:24; Amos 7:7).  The Israelites remaining alive at the time of the invasion will face enslavement by their foreign conquerors (Lev 26:33-39; Deut 28:32-42; Ezek 6:8-9; 12:4-6, 11; Hos 5:9). 

 

In terms of this coming punishment, it is importantly a part of the curses in the law to fall on Yisrael for sin (Lev 26; Deut 28).  It will be just as automatic and certain as the blessings were which have fallen on Yisrael for the past few centuries (because of the obedience of Avraham). 

 

From the outline of these curses in the Torah, it is clear that the curses (mainly the foreign conquests) in Leviticus 26 involve two periods of military conquest and captivity.  These two different conquests should not be confused.  They are different and are separated by about 2,700 years in time. 

 

There is a particular distinction between the fall of the House of Yisrael to the Assyrians, c700 BCE, and the coming fall of the House of Yisrael to various foreign conquerors in the age end.  The Torah shows the first conquest in Leviticus 26:14-17, while the age ending fall is covered in Leviticus 26:18-45.  The latter trial is far the worst.  

 

 

The Four Horns 

 

The basis of this final conquest and destruction of the House of Yisrael nations involves the actions of four primary powers called the four horns (Zech 1:19).  Daniel observes them as beasts, in ante-type (Dan 7:3-8; 8:1-19).  Please understand that these beast references were initially fulfilled in ante-type only.  But they have a great, typical fulfillment which will be still future and different. 

 

In this coming demonstration, the evidence is most persuasive that modern Iraq will be thought to be the resurrected Babylonian empire and be one of the horns.  Iran illustrates the Persian empire and will be an example of a second horn.  Syria (and/or possibly Greece or Turkey) seems to be the third and the fourth will be Russia, as the Eastern leg of the Roman Empire. 

 

These four horns will seemingly join into an alliance with Communist China, Japan, Latin America and other third world countries in Asia and Africa to militarily crush the House of Yisrael nations and subsequently commence an invasion of the Israeli state (to be later described in the context of an ante-type of fulfillment for Ezekiel 38-39). 

 

A fragment from the Dead Sea Scrolls (4Q554, Col 3) appears to describe this conflict (“The Dead Sea Scrolls, A New Translation,” p. 184).  It reflects that in the age end, the kingdom of Persia shall rise up with others--including people from Edom, Moab and Ammon “of the whole land of Babylon” to do evil to the descendants of Yisrael. 

 

Recently, the Jul 2001 “Internet Vortex” (p. 36) had an article by the previously cited Colonel Stanislav Lunev on “Russian Spying Escalates Worldwide” which indicated that Russian President Putin is trying to restore Russia’s “former glory.”  Lunev says that Putin has been building up a coalition of nations--like China, North Korea, Vietnam, Iran, Iraq, Libya, Syria, Cuba and others. 

 

The four horns are truly coming together (while the US reportedly defeated Iraq in the 2003 Bush war, the final chapter in this confrontation is not over.  Thus, one must not be lulled to sleep on the premise that Iraq cannot arise from the dust to inflict punishment upon the US in later days). 

 

As noted earlier, there will be at least two primary problems contributing to the military destruction of the House of Yisrael nations.  Firstly, these nations have rendered exceptional support and assistance to the Israeli state for 50 years and have made serious enemies in the Muslim nations. 

 

Secondly, the House of Yisrael nations have run up massive foreign debts, all over the world.  Someday, when Yisrael’s currencies are declared worthless and various foreign powers are left holding the bag, they will be angry and will proceed to launch a strike against their House of Yisrael enemies.  These reasons will both be elaborated upon in some detail in remarks hereafter. 

 

 

Possible Scenario of the First Years of Trouble 

 

Putting this all together, it is plausible to do some “prophetic interpretation” --plus a little logic and common sense and arrive at some semblance of how the first couple of years of trouble will probably unfold for the House of Yisrael nations and especially prophetic “Yisrael,” which sometimes is the House of Yosef made up of Ephraim and Manasseh (Gen 48:16). 

 

However, per Hosea and much of the Tanakh, Ephraim appears to primarily represent Yisrael.  Since prophetic Yisrael is first Ephraim and second Yosef collectively, most of the trouble and particularly the early trouble comes on them. 

 

It is only later that the other House of Yisrael nations get sucked into the fray.  In offering this scenario, this writer is no prophet, but only a limited person attempting to interpret the words of the prophets. 

 

In any discussion on Yisrael in the age end, the year 2000 appears to be a catalyst year, because it sets the stage for the start of Yakov’s Trouble, probably three to ten years later, as noted elsewhere herein.  A later chapter will outline events on Bul 15 and Teveth 10 in 2000, which suggest the first semblance of Yakov’s Trouble. 

 

Although trouble for Ephraim America did commence slowly in 2000 and continued in 2001, the evidence is that it will accelerate in later years with enormous stock market and monetary problems.  The ultimate seven years of Yakov’s Trouble may run from Yechezkel’s 30th-32d years and conclude when Yisrael returns to the land (in Yechezkel’s 37th-39th  years, as noted earlier). 

 

It may be that the trouble in Yechezkel’s 30th year marks off the return of Yisrael’s election (and maybe a few or some part of fleshly Yisrael--like perhaps physical Israelites, who are members of the immediate family of the election) to Jerusalem in the age end (around Bul 15-20, by Yechezkel’s 37th year), while the bulk of physical, fleshly Yisrael will essentially return in Yechezkel’s 38th and possibly 39th years. 

 

So Yakov’s Trouble may start in 2003-2008 and surge thereafter.  It ends first for the election (and possibly, some few fleshly Israelites at that time) in the fall of Yechezkel’s 37th year and next for the bulk of fleshly Yisrael, possibly by Yechezkel’s 38th-39th years.  As noted in a previous chapter, there are some reasons which might allow Yechezkel’s 30th year to be as early as 2003-2008. 

 

 

The Amalekites, Revisited 

 

Carrying this one step further, is it plausible that as a prelude to the coming conquest and destruction of Yisrael, the controlling Amalekites (previously discussed) will cause a slaughter of many of their opponents?  In this context, one could easily suppose that such an act would involve a great persecution, arrest and murder of “religious” Israelites, in opposition to the ruling Amalek-Edomites. 

 

Could this Amalek-Edomite oppression and persecution against religious Israelites be an assault upon the contemporary militia, patriot and Christian Identity movements in the earlier mentioned persecution on the right wing?  Right now, these possibilities need to be considered in the context of the modern fall of the House of Yisrael nations. 

 

Perhaps the first semblance of this Amalekite assault upon the Christian Identity movement and other elements of the Christian right wing was planned for late 1999 and early 2000, as a part of the Y2K phenomenon that was so extensively discussed in the media and which was to start at midnight on Dec 31, 1999--Jan 1, 2000. 

 

 

Y2K, Revisited   

 

The Y2K question arose across the world because many computers function with a recognition of the last two digits to define a year.  Some analysts believed that computers would confuse the 00 between 1900 and 2000, unless they were properly reprogrammed. 

 

The impact could have had a serious adverse impact upon infrastructure, such as electric power systems and so forth.  Estimates of computer failures ranged from 10% to 50% with 30% being the most common figure (Apr 1998 “Personal Update,” p. 14).  All the hype and fear prompted both government and private industry to spend billions of dollars to reprogram computers and take other precautionary steps. 

 

One of the other factors at work to further heighten the tension over Y2K was the reality of some on-going extraordinary sunspot activity in January 2000, which was to continue on into 2001-2002 for some months (Jul 1999 “Prophetic Observer,” p. 2). 

 

Sunspot activity alone could cause a crisis in communications, weather and other activities on earth.  Satellites were vulnerable and continued to be vulnerable into 2002 (in fact, some did fail on Jan 1, 2000).  On March 13, 1989, sunspot activity trashed a large public transformer unit in Canada.  So electric power can be affected. 

 

 

The Bunkers 

 

There was another fallout of the Y2K event which seems to have had some real relevance prophetically.  Supposedly, in preparation for Y2K, the White House, many state government offices, various military (to include the National Guard) and public safety command centers were prepared with underground shelters and bunkers to house certain public officials on December 31, 1999, and later as needed. 

 

The situation at the White House was that in July 1999, Clinton had a special, command and control center, underground bunker built at the White House in preparation for Y2K.  There is also a “Dark Winter” command bunker at Andrews Air Force Base.  It is unclear to what extent the Clintons personally used these facilitates for Y2K.  But as a minimum, they were manned and staffed by aides and workers. 

 

Canadian officials also used a bunker as a “command center” (Dec 1999 “Internet Vortex,” p. 13).  However, what is important is the fact that many leaders in America and Canada did go into these underground facilities for Y2K on Dec 31, 1999 (and will assuredly use them in the future as well). 

 

There is an interesting prophecy at Revelation 6:15-16 about national leaders hiding out in so-called caves, dens and rocks of the earth in order to avoid the wrath of YHWH. 

 

Of course, this prophecy has a future fulfillment (beyond Y2K).  Probably, it will be accomplished during the coming Russian-Chinese nuclear attack on Yisrael when national leaders and the elite hide out in underground facilities in order to avoid nuclear fall out. 

 

Subsequent chapters will assess the enormous propensity for duality in prophetic fulfillments.  There can be one or more ante-types before the prophesied type actually occurs.  This hide out by US national leaders over Y2K could very well have been an ante-typical fulfillment of Revelation 6:15-16. 

 

 

Project Megiddo, Revisited 

 

As late as October 20, 1999, the FBI released a report to supposedly warn state and local police to be alert for possible terrorist attacks at the turn of the millennium (Dec 1999 “Endtime News,” p. 1).  The report, called “Project Megiddo, said that “Religious extremists” and others fearful of “Armageddon” or a “New World Order” may use the millennial change as a pretext for unleashing a wave of violence. 

 

The report ostensibly warned the nation that militias, so-called “hate groups” and Christian religious sects might pose a “danger to the public,” in the context of the Y2K problem that would surface around January 1, 2000.  Former FBI Director Louis Freeh, himself (another likely Amalekite), and other officials touted the “Project Megiddo report (cited earlier) as being prophetic of what would happen during Y2K. 

 

While the focus of the so-called FBI study was upon the Y2K event of December 31, 1999, the report was drafted in a way that the prophesied trouble from the Christian right could come anytime thereafter. 

 

Naturally, the controlled media played up the report and said that law enforcement people across the nation were warned to make special efforts to monitor these so-called, right wing radicals and extremists. 

 

 

The Source 

 

The “Spotlight” paper of November 15, 1999 (p. 1, 3), had a story by Michael Collins Piper on “Private Espionage Group Feeds FBI Apocalypse Report.”  The backdrop on this story was an analysis of the FBI report on “Project Megiddo,” which supposedly was the work of studious, investigative, federal agents. 

 

Well, all of this may sound good to the gullible public.  But Piper began an inquiry into the mechanics of the report and found that it contained data from other reports and writings of the Anti-Defamation League (ADL) and Southern Poverty Law Center (SPLC) and was presented in a way which suggested that the ADL and SPLC actually wrote the report instead of the FBI.  

 

Therefore, the conclusion might have been that in anticipation of gross problems around Dec 31, 1999, and early 2000, the Amalekite controlled ADL and SPLC worked up the report to expose how the Christian right (led by the Christian Identity motion) would commence acts of terrorism in the US, in conjunction with Y2K, to bring about apocalyptic conditions in the US to precede the return of Gee-Zeus. 

 

Supposedly, the ADL and SPLC turned this report over to the FBI, which released it in 1999 as a federal report.  Of course, the objective was to build up hate and animosity toward the Christian right and especially the Christian Identity movement.  But there is still more to it than what first meets the eye. 

 

In the Sep-Dec 1999 “Jubilee” (p. 1, 8-14), Paul Hall, in a story on “FBI Declares WAR on Christians,” also made an analysis of the Project Megiddo report and likewise found it to seemingly be a product of the ADL and SPLC; plus evidently, a pagan-Witchcraft source. 

 

Hall notes that besides quoting the ADL and SPLC, there is also one quote and a reference to a website called “Ontario Consultants on Religious Tolerance” which has four names listed--one Wiccan (B. A. Robinson), two Unitarian Universalists (one an atheist and the other an agnostic) and an unaffiliated liberal.  The witch Robinson seems to be the primary writer.  The gist of this website is so-called religious tolerance. 

 

 

The “Anti-Demonization League” 

 

A follow-up report released by the “Scriptures for America” people and the Anti-Demonization League on an “Analysis of the F.B.I.’s ‘Project Megiddo’” suggested that  not only did hate groups, like the ADL and SPLC, prepare the Project Megiddo report; but that they have or will coordinate with the federal government to instigate some type of terrorist action in the future which can be blamed on the Christian right wing. 

 

As commented upon in previous remarks herein, some of the Amalekites are notorious about creating an incident which can be blamed on their supposed enemies in the right wing--like the Nazis, the Ku Klux Klan, the Christian Identity movement and the militias. 

 

Amalekites like to set fires at Jewish synagogues or write dirty words on synagogue walls and then work in league with federal agents and the controlled media to blame someone on the right. This is a common Amalekite trick, as was outlined in former chapters herein.  They are experts at deception and wickedness.

 

Hate groups, like the ADL and SPLC (which seem to be filled with Amalekites), are so vile and evil that it seems very possible that they would bomb and kill some Americans and then stage the event so that the militia, patriot and Christian Identity groups would be blamed (thus, something similar could be behind the September 11, 2001, attacks on the Pentagon and World Trade Center; so that fundamentalist Muslims could be blamed). 

 

To head this course off, some Christian Identity people prepared the “Anti-Demonization League” report which was given to the media and law enforcement personnel.  This ADL, SPLC and FBI work of harassing, accusing and intimidating the Christian right, in the sense of government oppression, was addressed in previous chapters herein.  But again, it must be recognized. 

 

As things turned out, Y2K largely fizzled out.  The nation of Gambia had some massive power outages, one communications satellite and the entire US intelligence satellite system failed, some airline schedules were messed up on the East coast and there were several other computer glitches (especially in small businesses and in some banking operations).  But nothing happened, as envisioned by the Christian right wing. 

 

Importantly, the FBI and its Amalekite cohorts had no opportunity in early January 2000 to carry through with their plans for “Operation Megiddo.”  Thus, the Amalekite goal for the wholesale arrests of Christian Identity and militia people on the right was put on hold--temporarily.  This doesn’t mean that this effort is over.  Clearly, it was only temporarily suspended.  Later, in Yechezkel’s 30th-33d years, it will surely resurface. 

 

 

More Christian Identity Oppression 

 

The Internet is proving to be an extraordinary source of information and communications here in the early 21st century.  Previous chapters have mentioned the move by the Amalekites and other leftists to exercise control over the Internet.  This is happening as the Amalekites are able to define some of the beliefs/practices of right wingers as being evil in some fashion. 

 

For example, in December 1999 and January 2000, an Internet service company called Mayberry USA (cited earlier herein) began an extensive advertising campaign to solicit customers to their Internet service which is to filter out and delete all Internet web sites that are supposedly pornographic and hate sites.  Mayberry’s ads focused upon the evils of pedophiles, terrorists, Nazis, pornographers and hate groups.

 

In mentioning the hate definition, it is clear that the politically correct position will be used here to attack, demean and censor all groups which society calls racists, White supremacists and similar groups allegedly opposed to Blacks, Jews, homosexuals and modern feminists.  For sure, Christian Identity Churches, Ku Klux Klan units and like groups will be screened out by Mayberry and other Internet services. 

 

 

The February 2000 Yahoo Case 

 

Another one of the companies providing Internet services is called Yahoo.  It would appear that Yahoo actually provides a number of different Internet services--search services, web sites with news and chat room features, and so forth. 

 

Apparently, in February 2000, the ADL discovered that persons involved with the Ku Klux Klan (who were probably federal agents since Big Brother has completely infiltrated the Klan, so much so, that it is now a federal government operation), the National Association for the Advancement of White People and the Church of the Creator actually exchanged messages or had chats, using the Yahoo Internet services. 

 

The ADL went on the attack immediately because these right wingers are simply not going to be allowed any free speech in America.  The ADL and the other Amalekite Jew hate groups will pull out all the stops and go after these right wingers with a vengeance and a goal of destroying them forever. 

 

The controlled national media was ablaze with press reports on Feb 26, 2000, that Yahoo had actually allowed these right wing “racists” to use its services.  Something had to be done.  Per the ADL, Yahoo would have to be closed down or new legislation would have to be passed to censure anyone who would not march to the Amalekite tune of spreading Balaam’s race ideas around. 

 

Naturally, the power of the ADL prevailed and Yahoo backed off and agreed to cancel the various groups opposed by the ADL (Mar 20, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 2). 

 

The national director of the ADL, Abraham H. “Foxman” (cited earlier and a likely Amalekite, who apparently thinks like a fox) welcomed Yahoo’s decision.  Abe went on to say that the ADL will work with other Internet providers to monitor “hate and deny extremists a platform at web sites where user policies strictly forbid offensive material.” 

 

Since the ADL and other Amalekite Jew hate organizations have started using the words “obscene” and “obscenity” in reference to their enemies (as outlined in a former chapter), they have found a new method of censoring the Internet.  Many Christians oppose obscenity.  So, when the ADL uses that word for its enemies, it helps to silence those enemies. 

 

A June 12, 2000, story on “Private Groups, Not Government, Lead War on Freedom of Speech” in “Spotlight” (p. 21) noted this new ADL tactic.  By defining ADL enemies as being obscene, many of the current Internet blocking services will block out those efforts.  Per “Spotlight,” one Israeli computer company (Elron Industries) has donated Internet blocking software to American schools (to block out Amalekite enemies). 

 

 

Making Criminals Out of Right Wing Christians 

 

But one more tragedy from this motion is that Big Brother in Washington will pick upon the same theme.  It is important to note that right wing Christians are being and will be cast in the same light as pornographers, pedophiles, terrorists and common criminals (actually, these right wing Christians and especially the Christian Identity people are even more hated by society than pornographers and common criminals). 

 

Surely, at some point in time, either Congress will legislate or the president will sign an Executive Order cracking down on the so-called right wing hate groups on the Internet.  It is a certainty that government will declare them illegal.  As a prelude to government action, it is clear that any number of private companies will take action right now to try to eliminate Christian Identity and similar web sites on the Internet. 

 

 

More Amalekite Deceit 

 

The latest Amalekite trick is to claim that right wing groups are in the drug business (evidently, in competition with the Amalekite Jew bankers/masters who run the US drug business).  Presumably, these charges would excite and get the gullible American Christians mad at the so-called right wingers/White supremacists. 

 

This move was documented in a statement from the Amalekite directed Southern Poverty Law Center which said:  “white supremacists are making a bid to control methamphetamine distribution” (Jan 4, 2002, “Idaho Observer,” p. 6). 

 

The editor of the “Idaho Observer” noted that in his 35 years of experience in investigating the inner workings of areas in the Northwest, he has found that the large scale drug business is a function of the regions’ elected power structure. 

 

The writer of this study at hand acknowledges that the governing politicians allow the drug business to proceed--primarily, because of receiving pay offs from the Amalekite Jew bankers/masters and  gang bosses (who are in charge of the drug trade and who run the organized crime world).  Anyway, the Amalekite charges could motivate the government to further crack down on the Christian right. 

 

 

A July 2001 Follow-Up 

 

As a more recent follow-up on this theme, the writer of this study at hand had a interesting thing happen which deserves mention.   In the first week of June 2001, this writer mailed a letter to some 25 leading Christian Identity preachers and leaders on the question of a new teaching being promoted by Identity preacher Pete Peters, as discussed previously herein. 

 

One of the addresses was Newman Brittain (now deceased), who had been formerly involved in Richard Butler’s Aryan Nations operation (also discussed earlier herein).  Butler had become entangled a few years ago with an Indian woman who claimed that she was assaulted by his compound guards as she and her son drove by the compound and allegedly shot some fire crackers to cause some trouble for Butler. 

 

Criminal charges were brought against some Aryan Nations guards and the woman filed a civil suit against Butler (as is likewise described heretofore).  Possibly, this action or something else prompted Butler to announce that he was retiring (he is elderly in his 80s) and would turn the Aryan Nations mantle over to Newman Brittain of Escondido, California (later, Butler seems to have reversed this decision). 

 

Accordingly, Brittain made an announcement in the Mar-Apr 2000 “Jubilee” (p. 15) of his assumption of the title of “Pastor” of the Church of Jesus Christ Christian (Butler’s church name).  In the Escondido area, Brittain held himself out as the leader of the Aryan Nations. 

 

Therefore, in mailing out data addressing this latest Peters’ effort on altering the Sabbath days and festivals, this writer sent a copy of the letter to Brittain in Escondido during the first week of June 2001 by first class mail (along with the 24 others mailed).  Time passed and it was assumed by me that the Brittain letter was satisfactorily delivered by the post office.  

 

 

Something Happened 

 

Then, on Jul 16, 2001, my first class letter to Brittain was returned by the post office (five and one-half weeks later, which would seem to be most unusual with this time delay).  An examination of the envelope disclosed several interesting things.  There were a couple of postal marks on the front of the envelope besides the stamp cancellation. 

 

There was a mark reading “return to sender attempted...”  Another mark said “Moved--Left no Address from Escondido, CA 92025” (since the letter had a correct readable return address, it was ultimately returned to me).

 

So curiosity overtook my mind and an examination of the envelope allowed that it may have been opened (there was a tear on it--which could have suggested a surreptitious opening).  Anyway, what happened to this first class letter for well over five weeks still seemed curious to me. 

 

Question--did the Escondido PO forward it to another person or place which did open it?  Could the letter have been routed to a federal agency for an examination to cause the five weeks plus delay?  Was the letter opened, checked and resealed as professionally as possible (surely, federal agents have ways of opening and resealing envelops which are almost undetectable). 

 

Preceding chapters have outlined the modern methods of federal spying operations to completely monitor all communications to and from certain selected groups. 

 

This new spying operation seems to involve post office participation--to perhaps include intercepting and spying upon first class mail and spying upon postal customers as they come into the post office to transact business.  Truly, the contemporary Christian Identity motion is now under enormous government oppression (as was pointed out earlier). 

 

 

Others Join in With the Amalekites 

 

Not only have government agents and provocateurs at all levels and in various Amalekite Jew hate groups all worked in collusion against the Christian Identity movement, but even some of the unorganized militia groups are also taking a stand of hate against their right wing brethren in the Christian Identity motion. 

 

The “Spotlight” paper of Sep 6, 1999 (p. 24), quoted the “London Sunday Times” with a report that the Michigan Militia has declared war on the Christian Identity, skinhead and other right wing racialist groups.  A leader in the Michigan Militia, named Lynn VanHuizen, suggests that “we” (meaning the militia) will be forced to take them out and kill them if necessary. 

 

The same “Spotlight” story says that the FBI has begun to focus on the Christian Identity groups as being greater threats than the anti-government militias.  VanHuizen went on to say that his group had no qualms in working with the government against the Christian Identity people. 

 

For sure, the Christian Identity movement will soon have almost everyone in America against it.  It won’t be long before its tribulation starts in earnest. 

 

While such a coming tribulation, trouble and test on the right wing and Christian Identity people will seem horrible, some good can come from it.  In the first place, it is possible that many of the very elect to constitute the age ending Philadelphia will come out of this motion.  If this is true, the people undergoing this trial will ultimately benefit from it as their personal lives are forcibly cleaned up (with YHWH’s approval). 

 

It is highly likely that the Christian Identity preachers and leaders will be arrested and murdered by the state.  With their removal, the honest people under them can break free of the shackles of lies and false teachings that they have been living under.  As they break free, some of them (of the very elect category) will assuredly turn to YHWH YESHUA and truth. 

 

It is such a tragedy that Christian Israelite people (certainly ignorant and Scripturally shallow persons) can become entrapped with almost any preacher who has some charisma and ability to sincerely lie and deceive.  This is manifestly true with the Christian Identity movement. 

 

 

Wicked Christian Preachers 

 

Most or all of the preachers and leaders of the Christian right-wing are extremely evil men who actively preach and teach against the Torah and truth.  The reality of the evils of Christian preachers and their use of charisma and charm to fool the Christian suckers was addressed in preceding chapters herein.  Suffice to say, it is the real world in our time. 

 

To add to the woe of people sucked into following these charlatans, it must be noted that the scholarship and informational levels of many of the Christian Identity leaders and big shots are on very questionable levels.  This reality is proven conclusively when some of these frauds began pushing and advocating the Greek Septuagint as authoritative for Christian Identity people (as pointed out in prior chapters). 

 

How can anyone with brains above the moron level choose to follow a translation of a writing in lieu of the actual, inspired work in its original language.  Yet, many of the Scripturally shallow Christian Identity bosses (like the earlier cited Peters and Richard) are teaching this precise approach.  When Big Brother moves against these charlatans, some of their dumb sheep followers may at last break free to turn to truth. 

 

 

Deceiving the Dumb Sheep 

 

As these evil Christian Identity leaders have turned away from the Hebrew OT to a corrupt and very deficient Greek translation, their dumb sheep followers are also being turned away from the valid source of truth to try to find understanding in very bad Greek writings. 

 

What a tragedy it has been that these evil Identity leaders have been turning their followers away from the only source of truth which there is on planet earth.  Manifestly, when tribulation and trouble strikes these Christian Identity people (especially their leaders), it will be very justified because of their evil, confusion and lack of knowledge (from turning away from truth and the Hebrew OT source of truth). 

 

In any case, Yechezkel’s 30th year might possibly see the work of at least two or four prophets/witnesses--likely the types of Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu (either in or working with the House of Yisrael), who were the two primary prophets at the fall of Jerusalem to the Babylonians in c554 BCE, and perhaps some aspects of the work of the final two witnesses.  

 

The work of these possible two pairs of men will be assessed in some detail in later chapters.  While the first two prophets (if they arrive on the scene) may have a ministry of only three years or so, the final two witnesses may have a ministry of seven years (with their work behind the scenes for the first half of the heptad and a public work to the world for the last half of the heptad). 

 

Thus, there could be four important men at work in the age end, in the context of prophesying, as will be discussed in some detail in later chapters. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 509--More Trouble for Yisrael

 

 

The Stage is Set 

 

With the financial market situation that developed in 1998, precipitating troubles in markets around the world from Asia to Latin America and Russia, it appears that from 1999 and on forward into 2002, the years started off and continued on in largely inflation-flat modes.  In this environment, the currency of particularly Ephraim has continued its global acceptance and dominance into early 2003. 

 

Otherwise, the financial market problems have and will likely continue to surface worldwide, as the age end approaches.  Probably, most of the beginning trouble will connect to the global stock markets and not so much with the currency markets (where trouble will come later).  But the Amalekite bankers will initially keep on manipulating and controlling all of the markets for their profit and gain purposes. 

 

Hence, prophetic Yisrael will be able to continue to import food, oil, trinkets, and toys from other nations for awhile.  Israelite people did have food to eat and gas to burn in their automobiles, even into early 2003--though the trend on oil prices has been up, depending upon what all happens in these transitional days. 

 

Bush launched his war against Iraq on Mar 20, 2003.  These lines are being written after the alleged US conquest.  Though the US had the upper hand, it is interesting that the US has had constant problems and routinely been telling many lies.  There is always some question about what the fall-out will be on this as the US occupation continues.  As a minimum, a US financial meltdown is waiting in the wings. 

 

It is hard for this writer to expect much US success in her Iraqi occupation (although the US has had overwhelming power).  It will be important prophetically if the US has to withdraw for some reason.  Howbeit, time will tell. 

 

 

The Start of Trouble in Nature 

 

Importantly, the confidence/pride present in Yisrael from 1993 to 2000 has continued into 2003.  But surely, this pride will begin to fall as signs of real trouble start to surface and especially if the Muslim problems drag on.  Perhaps too, there will be, by 2004-2008, some climatic/weather problems of major significance. 

 

As a minimum, 2004-2008 could be significant years in terms of hurricanes, tornadoes, storms, floods, droughts, etc.  Likely, three months before the harvest, in a soon coming period, a pronounced drought will start.  Water tables will start to dry up and all of a sudden, potable water will become an important commodity in short supply. 

 

This drought will surely start by Yechezkel’s 31st-32d years (its beginnings may have surfaced in the summer of 1999 on parts of the Eastern US seaboard and continued on into 2000).  Early 2001 started off with a severe drought in the Pacific NW and SE US.  The May 14, 2001, “US News & World Report” (p. 23) suggested extreme drought conditions and wildfires in much of the Southeast and parts of the Pacific NW in 2001.

 

And the late spring and early summer of 2002 saw an enormous drought over much of the US, East of the Continental Divide (May-Jun 2002 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 49)--plus enormous flooding in Texas in the summer.  As outlined earlier, the April 8, 2002, “Time” magazine (p. 20) had a US map that showed about half of the US in a drought condition, under the  title -- “A Nation in Need of April Showers.” 

 

Part or much of the US is expected to be in a serious drought in the next several years.  This condition could spell out some disastrous coming problems in the context of wildfires.

 

Clearly, the last couple of years have created a situation where part of the United States is in a drought condition and part seems to be getting too much rain or snow.  Apparently, this is the precise situation that is evolving in 2003 (as just noted, drought predictions are in place for the future).  A bad drought and its timing could have real prophetic implications, as will be covered in subsequent comments herein. 

 

By Yechezkel’s 30th-32d years, Yisrael may see several volcanoes erupt over its Western part, as discussed in a prior chapter.  The ash could blacken the skies and cause trouble. 

 

With the reoccurrence of the Leonids’ meteor showers on November 17, 1999; November 17, 2000; November 18, 2001; and November 18, 2002 (all of which were somewhat significant)--plus the possibility of a big earthquake in the US or the Middle East by Yechezkel’s 30th-32d years--many religious people will suppose that they are seeing the fulfillment of Revelation 6:13-14 (except these signs will correctly be ante-types of what is to come). 

 

In the United States, several fault zones, like the San Andreas, San Madrid and others, are all long overdue for a gigantic break.  Of course, the Scriptures offer an abundance of earthquake activity in the climatic age end, as outlined earlier. 

 

 

Terrorist Attacks 

 

Conflicts will accelerate with the four horns (the US war on Iraq may signal the beginnings of these conflicts). 

 

Significant Islamic or Orthodox (Russian or Serbian) terrorism is highly probable in America by Yechezkel’s 30th-32d years--maybe a small nuclear blast or the release of some deadly toxins and bacteria.  There has even been talk of Muslim suicide bombers in the US in 2003 (because of the US war against Iraq).  So things are definitely getting worse. 

 

Any of these situations will cause deaths and can precipitate the declaration of a national emergency which will officially end all freedoms now accepted by most Israelite Americans. 

 

Actually, several of the enemies of the US have been anxious to commit terrorist acts in America.  Any number of radical leftist groups could and would like to take their vengeance out on the US and especially now with the Bush war against Iraq. 

 

The Jan 2002 “American Sentinel” (p. 4) noted that UN authorities reported that there have been 153 thefts of nuclear material and 183 disappearances of radioactive isotopes in 2001.  Much of this stuff can easily be converted to dirty bombs which can be set off without much expertise or effort.  Such a bomb in most US cities would kill thousands. 

 

This same “American Sentinel” also mentioned the chemical threat.  Any number of US companies have huge quantities of very deadly chemicals on hand at any given time.  What would happen if a bomb went off near one of them?  There could be massive contamination in a large area. 

 

The May 10, 2002, “The Week” (p. 36) quoted America’s most famous investment advisor, billionaire Warren Buffett.  He said on CBS that “We’re going to have something in the way of a major nuclear event in this country.  Whether it will happen in 10 years or 10 minutes, or 50 years...it’s a virtual certainty.”  Buffett expects terrorists to again target New York or Washington for more attacks. 

 

 

Why the Delay? 

 

Beyond the 1993 terrorist bombing of the World Trade Center and the now more recent Sep 11, 2001, attacks upon the World Trade Center and the Pentagon (which were addressed in former chapters), the question must be asked why the Muslims haven’t struck more often (and especially, with the US wars in Afghanistan and Iraq)? 

 

Assuredly, America’s borders are some of the most open in the world.  Almost anyone can enter the US.  Smuggling in anything doesn’t seem to be much of a problem (as proven with the constant flow of all kinds of drugs).  The few Algerians arrested in late December 1999 trying to enter the US with bombs was clearly a petty operation.  Professional terrorists would never get caught this way. 

 

So, if radical Islamics have not yet chosen to launch more terrorist attacks against the so-called Great Satan, one must ask why?  This problem was discussed on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio talk show program by Art’s guest on December 10, 1998 (a man named Joel Skousen, who was quoted earlier herein on the situation in Israel). 

 

Joel perceptively hit the mark when he said that the reason the US was not plagued with internal terrorist attacks in the 1990s (except for the 1993 NY Trade Center bombing, which seems to have been an FBI sting operation gone astray, as discussed earlier) was because of the secret rulers behind the scenes (calling the shots), who told them to lay off for awhile. 

 

These lines are being written in early 2003 (near Aviv 1), after Muslim terrorists allegedly hi-jacked four US commercial airliners to fly them into the NY World Trade Center and the Pentagon on Sep 11, 2001, and after Bush launched his wars against Afghanistan and Iraq.  The US claimed that the terrorist attacks on the US were made by the Saudi terrorist Osama bin Laden, who had been harbored in Afghanistan. 

 

Joel Skousen was further quoted in the Nov 2002 “Radio Liberty” newsletter (p. 3).  In a follow-up mode to his above comments, he noted that if al Qaeda was intent on destroying America, why then were there no further attacks in late 2001 or during 2002 (or 2003--ed)?  Skousen believes that the CIA created al Qaeda and still controls it (this option will be further assessed in later chapters). 

 

The recent Sep 11, 2001, event may precipitate a change in the whole US situation with terrorism.  The US leadership announced plans to conduct a war of sorts against Afghanistan and other Muslim states that have harbored Bin Laden, his supposed allies and/or other terrorists.  This has involved both air and ground actions in Afghanistan (in 2002) and Iraq (in 2003). 

 

Once this war proceeds on a state level (as with Afghanistan, Iraq or some other Muslim state), it is possible that Muslim terrorists may really go to work on the US.  The next several months may see any number of terrorist attacks in the US and in her ally nations (like the White British Commonwealth). 

 

 

More Terrorism to be Blamed on the Christian Right 

 

As Joel outlined it, the ruling plutocrats want terrorist attacks to impose more laws and controls in paving the way for world government (as happened in the US under GWB, following the 9-11 terrorist attacks). 

 

But they have wanted those attacks to come from the so-called religious right wing so that the first big crack down on people can be directed at the Christian fundamentalists on the right (which can be arrested and imprisoned en masse at the proper time).   

 

Certainly, the FBI and any number of other federal police agencies have infiltrated people (as agent provocateurs) and used other possible methods (brainwashing, mind control, etc) to focus upon some people on the right to induce terrorist acts (especially in the Christian Identity movement, the militias, etc, as mentioned previously and to be covered in later presentations). 

 

This focus has paid off to some extent with the Oklahoma City bombing, the conflict with Randy Weaver, the shootings by Buford Furrow in LA, the various abortion clinic bombings and so forth (most of these events have been assessed in prior chapters). 

 

In any case, there has to be some reason why the Russians and Islamics have backed off and chosen to not initiate much in the way of domestic terrorism in the US through 2003 (beyond the just noted NY Trade Center and Pentagon attacks).  Whether Joel has it right or there is another reason is unclear. 

 

In the case of the Russians, they have been paid off in the late 20th century with Western money to keep a low profile and pretend to be capitalists. 

 

This course has been discussed in former chapters on the role of Amalekite gangsters in Moscow to steal this Western money.  If and when the money dries up or a new hard line Russian ruler surfaces (which may even be the present incumbent, Valdimir Putin, if he adopts a hard line toward the West), the picture could suddenly change. 

 

But somewhere down the pike, these acts of terrorism will commence in earnest.  They will surely include chemical, biological and nuclear attacks.  When they start, martial law will be quickly invoked by Big Brother.  The best estimate is that this problem will arise in earnest sometime in Yechezkel’s 31st-32d years (when the first signs of really serious economic troubles could surface). 

 

 

More Financial Problems 

 

Clearly, starting near the 15th day of the eighth Scriptural month in 2000, the bulk of Yisrael’s financial markets started having problems (although some stock market troubles came earlier).  But the US markets were apparently held in place in lateral movements for the next several months through efforts of the Amalekite managed market control unit (as was described in previous chapters). 

 

Yisrael’s monetary currency, which has had wide acceptance over the world, will ultimately destruct (maybe after the stock market falls have run their course).  The money, bonds, and debt spread out over the globe will at last be acknowledged as worthless. 

 

With worthless money, the imports of food, oil, cars, trinkets and toys will cease and the foreign countries and people left holding the bag will be angry.  What will these foreign powers do when they realize that they have been cheated and scammed (by the US and her plutocratic rulers)? 

 

In Yisrael, the only thing of real value will be gold, silver and certain foreign currencies.  But Yisrael’s Big Brother government will not sit by and idly allow people to have such valuables for long.  Just as Roosevelt called in gold in 1933, the present government will assuredly call in all silver and gold under penalty of death for violations.  They may even go after collector coins and jewelry as well. 

 

This call in of gold and silver could come earlier, if martial law is declared earlier.  For sure, it is coming soon! 

 

 

Tell Lies to Shift the Blame 

 

Quite naturally, the Big Brother government in Ephraim-Yisrael will try to lie her way out of the mess and blame right-wingers.  But it won’t totally work this time.  It is probable that through powerful communications sources, such as the Internet, numbers of citizens will become aware of how their government has lied to them consistently over the last several years. 

 

Probably, when the bad economic and financial news begin to sink in, the people will discover that the Slick Clinton administration lied and deceived the public for eight years about the so-called prosperity and surpluses--which supposedly were occurring under Slick’s great leadership (and assuredly, the GWB people have been continuing with some of the same lies to deceive the public over money and spending). 

 

While the Big Brother government will make every effort to blame right wing Christians (particularly in the Christian Identity motion), this effort may not succeed as Big Brother may desire, per the above.  But surely, it will succeed sufficiently for the president and his allies to begin a persecution of the right in the vein of arrests, imprisonments and murders of right wingers. 

 

As noted earlier herein, there is some question about how Slick Clinton can regain power.  If there should be a new constitution in connection with economic troubles and the death or removal of George W. Bush, one must be prudent and allow that US troubles may prompt a constitutional convention to decide on returning Clinton as president (or he may come in with a Hillary presidency/vice-presidency). 

 

In the coming days, one cannot rule out Colin Powell either.  He also has a role to play in the New World Order and may gain the US presidency for a time.  But as incompetent as he is (as established earlier herein), it is doubtful that he can restore order.  Thus, troubles will continue. 

 

 

Blame the Jews? 

 

In any case, and if and when Slick can return to the presidency or gain control over the US with a rulership at the UN or through Hillary (if she can gain the presidency or even vice-presidency), Slick may not successfully pull the scam off of blaming the Christian right wing for all of America’s problems. 

 

If Slick does not return to power in some form, the same question may face some other person in the presidency (like GWB, Colin Powell or whomever).  Thus, the US president (whomever he is) could conceivably then turn to blaming the Jews (just as happened with Adolf Schicklgruber in Germany years ago). 

 

Such a course could spell out a break between Clinton, Bush or whomever is in the presidency and the president’s Amalekite handlers; which, in turn, might prompt them to turn on the president (just as they turned on Schicklgruber). 

 

When people like Clinton, in particular, and the Amalekites are working together, there must always be a question of which party will be the first one to double cross the other.  Both parties are extremely treacherous and evil.  Almost the same thing can be said for most other highly visible US national leaders. 

 

So far, the Amalekites have allowed and supported Clinton and the Bushes for national leadership, providing that they would allow the Amalekites a free rein to steal as much of the United States as is possible (just as the Amalekite Khazars worked for eight years with former Russian President Boris Yeltsin). 

 

But the possibility of a double cross between the US Amalekite power brokers and the US president has continued to remain a viable possibility. 

 

Of course, such an eventuality could pave the wave for civil war and a repeat of what happened in Jerusalem when the Amalekites turned on the true Jews during the Roman War (66-70 CE).  In our time, the Amalekite Jews could use their media power to hype up the gullible goyim into mobs to act against the president in an effort to bring him down.  This option will be discussed further in a later appendix. 

 

 

More Lies and Deceptions 

 

In the context of the above remarks on Clinton and the US economy, the summer of 1999 saw the Clinton administration proclaim coming budget surpluses of trillions of dollars over the next several years--ostensibly following giant surpluses in 1998, 1999 and 2000 (before trouble erupted in late 2001, GWB offered some similar allegations). 

 

These irresponsible and false assertions really pacified the ignorant, uninformed, gullible, goyim, Christian Israelites. 

 

However, just as Slick lied and deceived the public routinely in all aspects of his administration (on defense, international affairs, domestic issues, sex, economic statistics, etc), he consistently lied about the budget and financial picture. 

 

Slick learned from the Amalekites Franklin Roosevelt and Adolf Schicklgruber that a lie told often enough will soon be accepted and believed by the gullible people.  Consequently, Bill employed this strategy from day one of his term--starting in 1993. 

 

To be able to bring the budget deficit down, Slick manipulated, changed and altered all kinds of data (undoubtedly, the GWB administration is continuing many of the same tricks and deceptions to paint a false picture of the US economy and financial situations). 

 

 

Accounting Tricks 

 

For the last several years, the US government has been taking Social Security trust funds and placing them into the annual operating budget to reduce the deficit.  It is very likely that Slick did the same thing with other trust funds and funding obligation moneys (like Railroad and Civil Service retirement funds?). 

 

In terms of the bond and security markets, Slick virtually discontinued long term bonds to concentrate upon short term paper (which comes due more quickly, but bears a lower interest rate).  This has brought down his budget deficits short term.  But it will fuel an utter crisis in a few years--when all of this short term paper comes due. 

 

There are manifest reasons to believe that Slick manipulated a whole series of US government accounting and funding procedures to be able to presumably turn the annual US deficit into a so-called surplus. 

 

Such accounting tricks could be done with loan funds and other expenditures.  Many of these disbursements can easily be hid or manipulated in some manner (like off budget) to avoid entry into a given year’s budget as outlays. 

 

This writer is very suspicious that Slick Clinton (and now George W. Bush and/or whomever else could conceivably get in the White House in the coming days) manipulated the budget data in many ways to deceive the American people. 

 

While the full truth may never be known (under man’s mis-rule), it is possible that some or most of it will somehow eventually come out.  And if so, it will cause a major crisis in the US (and especially about the time of the melt down of the US monetary and economic systems). 

 

 

Data From Spotlight  

 

“Spotlight” (p. 8) of July 19, 1999, had an article on “Fraudulent Spending Spotlighted” which focused upon the Clinton allegations of budget surpluses in 1998 and 1999.  For example, “Spotlight” offered some data from US Senator Jesse Helms, which had been entered into the Congressional Record. 

 

All the while that Slick was claiming surpluses, the actual US national debt has continued to go up dramatically under Clinton.  On Jun 29, 1994, the federal debt reportedly stood at $4,604,970,000.00.  On Jun 29, 1998, it was at $5,502,438,000.00 and on Jun 29, 1999, it had rose to $5,602,716,451,360.35.  Thus, it went up in 1999 by $100 billion over 1998 and since 1994, it has risen some $1 trillion. 

 

For many reasons, which are beyond the scope of this publication, it must be realized that the US government has for years been manipulating budget deficit data to hide it from the public.  As just noted, certain loans, obligations and contingencies are never reflected in the deficit (they are off budget).  This badly understates the real deficit. 

 

And in discussing the deficit position, one must not lose sight of the $billions or $trillions lost, stolen or spent by the Amalekites in the privately owned Fed, which are never correctly linked to the US financial status, as should happen.  The Fed has squandered or wasted billions around the world in supporting various foreign currencies and in the stock market control unit (as discussed elsewhere herein). 

 

“Spotlight” (p. 5) of Feb 21, 2000, had a report by Mike Blair on “Everything’s ‘Great’ -- Just Another of Clinton’s Big Lies” which raised questions about the Clinton stories on the US economy.  Blair quoted US Congressman James Traficant on his criticism of WalMart for selling Red Chinese goods. 

 

In shoes alone, some 250 American shoe factories have been closed down and moved abroad--costing some 10,000 jobs.  Yet, the US trade deficit is going out of the ceiling.  No one seems to know why. 

 

Another story in the same “Spotlight” (p. 8-9) quoted Senator Byron Dorgan who said that before NAFTA, the US had a trade surplus with both Canada and Mexico.  Now, the US has a trade deficit with both nations.  Between 1998-1999, the US trade deficit with Canada went up from $14 billion to $28 billion.  Will gullible Americans ever wake up and realize what is happening to their nation?  No, not until it is too late.  

 

 

A Collapse of Confidence 

 

With all of this skullduggery going on in America’s financial house of cards, how will the belief and confidence of the people react when the dishonesty, lies and cheating is eventually made public?  Confidence in the government will surely collapse (probably, by Yechezkel’s 31st-32d years). 

 

And this course is highly likely whenever the US financial and economic institutions ultimately fall.  Retirement funds and savings will vanish almost overnight.  There will be panic in Yisrael over the (at last) acknowledged bankruptcy of her currency. 

 

If martial law is not yet declared, it surely will occur very soon with the meltdown of Yisrael’s monetary and economic systems.  Soon, hyper-inflation will appear as the government prints and spends money, trying to save the system for the ruling Amalek-Edomite plutocrats. 

 

 

Martial Law? 

 

As a minimum, the US government and several other nations are concerned.  At the moment, it appears that Bill Clinton had been making preparations for the installation of marital law if any trouble did erupt.  The better view might be that something else (like the above mentioned stock market and monetary collapses and a new constitution) will happen to allow Slick to regain power and declare his dictatorship. 

 

Elections were held in 2000.  But they were very indecisive on the issue of a president (though George W. Bush was finally certified).  This situation made it very difficult for Slick to stay in power in January 2001.  Hence, he could not or did not maneuver events to stay in power (or perhaps, it was planned by the plutocrats for Bush to be the fall guy, when things do fall apart). 

 

But the November 2000 election dilemma, the succeeding court actions and conflicts, the rebellion of the Blacks, the unpopularity of liberals for Bush, the coming economic problems, the poor health of Dick Cheney, the likely death of Bush and a new constitution open the door for Slick to regain power and declare martial law.   

 

In any case, Yechezkel’s 31st year will surely present some problems in the House of Yisrael nations.  These problems will intensify as Yakov’s Trouble really commences in severity.  Therefore, it is likely that difficulties and troubles will be so present by Yechezkel’s 31st year that false Christianity may look upon those days as the beginning of the age end trouble. 

 

By Yechezkel’s 32d year, Christians will be anticipating the Beast power and the great tribulation (which, in most Christian eyes, will end within three years or so--perhaps when the real Beast and tribulation arise).  Evangelicals and people on the right will be very excited about the age end. 

 

In terms of the Christian Identity movement, its time of persecution (elsewhere discussed herein) may start whenever Big Brother declares martial law. 

 

 

More Troubles 

 

Thus, there were some problems in 2000-2003, but the better view is that they were really minor (like the serious drought over much of the US and the large fires in NM, MT, ID and WA).  Real trouble comes some time later. 

 

With the coming of Yechezkel’s 31st-32d years, there will likely be fuel/power problems (following the coming financial difficulties).  The behemah will at last begin to break free of the government’s welfare and pacification efforts over the last 70 years.  At some point in time, the behemah will go wild (like animals) as they terrorize urban areas and indeed even the nearby country-sides in search of food. 

 

For sure, enormous racial problems are on the drawing boards as the Amalekites continue to push their race mixing agenda upon the credulous Whites.  It’s easy enough to see that giant racial confrontations will eventually erupt between the Whites, Blacks and Hispanics. 

 

A good illustration of this concerns an incident that occurred in May 2002 when the Hispanic motorcycle gang called the Mongols got into a brawl and shoot out with the White Hell’s Angels at Harrah’s Casino in Reno, Nevada (May 13, 2002, “American Free Press,” p. 3).  This was a pure and simple racial conflict, though the controlled media did not report it that way. 

 

 

And More 

 

Since Ephraim-Yisrael will renege on her huge foreign debt (in trillions of dollars in money, bonds and securities spread around the world), foreign nations will become extremely angry that they have been left holding the bag. 

 

The four horns will be involved in this loss.  And because they are already filled with bitterness and hate for the House of Yisrael (over the Israeli support), they will likely lead the way in initiating an economic assault of some sort upon Ephraim-Yisrael (embargo, boycott or something in Yechezkel’s 31st year, perhaps around the 10th day of Teveth). 

 

The four horns and the other world powers, like perhaps the UN, will try to pressure the House of Yisrael to get her financial house in order and make some pledges on how she will begin paying off the astronomical foreign debt.  Perhaps, fairly soon, Yisrael’s leaders will satisfy the foreign powers that indeed action will be taken to pay off the debts.  The first economic trouble will temporarily end--maybe after 40 days or so. 

 

The evil politicians in Yisrael (who have caused the problem) will blame the people and particularly conservatives.  They will launch or rather intensify (since this persecution has already started) a massive persecution on the right wing and politically incorrect people in general.  Many will die or be sent to jail. 

 

It seems virtually a certainty that the pagan Christmas and New Years events and parties will likely be very unhappy times for most of Yisrael, starting in Yechezkel’s 31st year.  Much of the former revelry and partying should dry up in that year. 

 

At sometime, probably in Yechezkel’s 31st year, the beasts of the field (the behemah) may begin their wild unrestrained terror over the surviving Israelites.  Things will surely accelerate in going from bad to worse.  Intelligent Israelites will begin getting or using passports to leave their land and go elsewhere.  Many will go to Jerusalem (or Jordan), as noted earlier and as will be further discussed in comments to follow. 

 

 

The Trouble Intensifies 

 

But Yisrael fails to clean up her act.  She historically believed that the spending of government money solved all problems.  Now, it will not solve any problems!  Perhaps there is just too much debt--both domestically and internationally. 

 

Couple this condition with the fact that the historic government spending has created a lazy welfare state, where many Israelites and almost all behemah will not work, spells out a coming economic disaster. 

 

The former embargo or economic difficulty evidently will resume in about the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 32d year--except it will resume with more intensity (likely, as a powerful siege on both Ephraim and Manasseh (because Manasseh, too, is in trouble financially), as a minimum.  Soon, it could extend to the whole White British Commonwealth.  Nothing will be allowed into Yisrael. 

 

Absolute panic and terror will stalk the various nations of Yisrael.  But the prophesying of the first two prophets (perhaps Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu or two other historic prophets in the flesh or by their use of mental telepathy with two contemporary people) should be in place in Yechezkel’s 30th year--though most people will not care about these messengers or even know of them (because of a media blackout of the truth). 

 

The winters of Yechezkel’s 31st-32d and 32d-33d years should be very hard for Israelite people--primarily because fuel and power shortages, mentioned above, and perhaps the beginnings of food shortages.  Heat and staying warm will become a progressively more serious problem.  There won’t be much, if any, electrical power or natural gas.  Some people living near trees may cut them down for heat. 

 

The food problem grows from shortages to famine and ultimately cannibalism (in Yechezkel’s 33d year), when there is no food left in the land.  Even people who tried to anticipate the problem and stored food away will find that the government will confiscate it in her dictatorial take over of the nation.  However, people with a secure, remote retreat will fare a little better during the siege than others. 

 

 

The Nuclear Attack

 

The four horn powers and their allies grow impatient.  By the spring of Yechezkel’s 33d year (in early Siwan), they will likely be prepared to strike.  They evidently do so with an initial nuclear attack--to be followed with an invasion about 30 or so days later.  Yisrael will have no defenses.  No one goes out to fight.  Even the women, Blacks and queers, now in Yisrael’s army, will panic and flee when it’s time to fight. 

 

During the 9th to 17th days of the fourth month of perhaps Yechezkel’s 33d year, the foreign nations holding first mortgages on Yisrael’s lands will enter Yisrael to take possession of those lands (both the public lands and the private lands, as was described in a former chapter). 

 

The surviving Yisrael will be subdivided to their conquerors--to include the behemah, chaiyah and nokri-nekar aliens present.  The bloodline Israelites surviving will be forced into captivity and slavery.  Likely, 90% of the true Israelites will be dead by the fall of Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

In mentioning this nuclear attack upon Yisrael, just before the conclusion of the siege, it must be noted that there could be some nuclear terrorist attacks in Yechezkel’s 30th-32d years and particularly at the start of the siege--possibly in Yechezkel’s 32d year.  But the primary attacks will likely come near the end of the siege, in the late spring of probably Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

The effects and horrors of this nuclear attack will be assessed in the next chapter.  Suffice to say, it will be an utter calamity for Yisrael. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 510--Nuclear War

 

 

Background 

 

In 1969, this writer was first exposed to the incredible and far reaching importance of the book of Ezekiel to the United States and the White British Commonwealth.  Taking the prophesied deaths, in the context of the two-thirds figures in Ezekiel and Revelation, it is very plain that this coming war (apparently WWIII) will be enormous in the hundreds of millions (or even in the billions). 

 

To estimate those deaths in a period of a little over a year (390 days), some extraordinary killing methods would be needed.  Though little thought was given 30 (plus) years ago to the prospects of an enemy power using biological agents (which can rapidly spread to inflict huge disease and epidemic outbreaks), it seemed most evident that famine and nuclear war would be involved. 

 

In those early years of being exposed to the demands of Yechezkel, the Scriptures often seemed a little vague and obscure in the context of describing nuclear war.  But this was to change in the 1970s when this writer became acquainted with a student of the Word named James Griffin, who then lived in Southern Texas. 

 

Griffin’s background was that as a young man he had been involved in an armed robbery incident in Kansas.  He was caught and sent to the Kansas State Penitentiary for a number of years. 

 

Since modern Americans have chosen to disobey the Scriptural demands of punishment for criminals (death, whippings and restitution), contemporary prisons provide a great deal of idle time for most inmates.  With this abundance of time and nothing to do, some prisoners have pursued the task of following the path of religion. 

 

Some of them surely are sincere and well meaning in their efforts, while others have brains enough to recognize that a supposedly rehabilitated, religious prisoner (especially if he is a Christian) has a better opportunity of getting an early parole.  And getting out can be a powerful inducement for religion. 

 

Whether getting out of prison was the motivation behind James Griffin’s religious work or not is irrelevant.  What is important is to recognize that he did become interested in religion and in the Hebrew Tanakh.  Over a period of years, while in prison, he learned Scriptural Hebrew and made his own translation of the Tanakh into English. 

 

 

James Was Special 

 

But James was unique in other ways as well.  He was really a very intelligent, brilliant person with a photogenic mind.  Years ago, there used to be a game program on television called the $64,000 Question.  It was a simple question and answer game among two opponents. 

 

Occasionally, the program had a contestant on who had a similar photogenic mind which had allowed him to read and absorb vast quantities of information over his life.  With this extraordinary perception and memory, it was said that one of these contestants could read a book or encyclopedia entry and remember almost all of its details by making a mental picture of the words. 

 

In later years, information surfaced suggesting that during some portion of time that the $64,000 Question program was on the air, it was rigged (although not all of it, all of the time).  Nevertheless, it was probable that some of the guests did have the photogenic minds under discussion and truly were brilliant people. 

 

With his mental abilities, Griffin rapidly absorbed huge quantities of information on Scriptural Hebrew.  His translation was utterly unique and offered insight that this writer had not seen before in other English translations.  Moreover, James had some understanding and could put some data together to clarify several confusing points. 

 

 

Some Griffin Translations on Nuclear War 

 

Jim’s most impressive text was Isaiah 9:18, which he gave as:  “Lawlessness shall burn like fire--consuming the thorns and briers; yea, it shall set ablaze the thickets of the forest (the densely populated cities), and they shall cause themselves to be blown up in a column of smoke.” 

 

For Isaiah 33:8, 12, 14, he found:  “He has broken the treaty; --he has vaporized the cities: --He has no regard for mankind!  Nations shall be burned to ashes, like dried thorn-bushes burned in the fire.  Trembling has seized the hypocrites, as they cry out, Oh, who among us can survive the devouring fire?  Can any of us live through this eternal burning?--this nuclear heat!” 

 

He rendered Isaiah I:29-31 as:  “You (people of Israel) shall turn pale (in horror) at the helplessness of your mighty leaders which you have looked to; and you shall turn red (in fury) because of the defense systems (defensive coverings) which you have chosen! 

 

“Then the strong one (the rich and powerful politician) shall become as rotten string (he will break!), and his works for a flash (his productions shall serve as fuel for the fire); and they shall burn up--both of them together--in a fire (nuclear) that no one can extinguish!” 

 

With this prodding from Griffin’s work, this writer spent some time in a follow up mode and found a huge assortment of other Scriptures which tell about the same thing. 

 

Many other texts seem to describe nuclear war and terrible fallout (like Lev 26:25-28; Lam 2:3-5, 21; 4:11, 18-19; Isa 1:7; 6:11; 9:18-19; 17:9, 11; 33:11-12; 40:23-24; Jer 6:4; 9:7-14; 18:14-17; Ezek 5:3-4; 6:14; 7:14-18; 12:20; 15:7-8; 22:20-22, 31; 33:28-29; Hos 8:14; 11:6; Joel 2:30; Amos 4:11; 5:6-9; Mic 7:13; Hab 2:13). 

 

 

The Prelude to This Nuclear Attack 

 

Other portions of this study elsewhere alludes to this coming war and how rapidly it will consume the US, Canada, Britain, Australia and New Zealand.  The remaining White presence in the Republic of South Africa will undergo a Black assault at this time, although it may not involve a nuclear attack there.  But there will be a White blood-bath there, as well as in the other applicable areas. 

 

In any case, the catalyst for this attack is the 390-day siege and/or embargo upon the House of Yisrael nations, discussed in preceding remarks.  This trouble seems to start in earnest in Yechezkel’s 31st-32d years.   

 

It will seem to drag on and on into Yechezkel’s 33d year with no resolution, as was the case with the US imposed embargo on Communist Cuba (which lasted for decades upon decades without ending). 

 

The Anglo-Saxon-Celtic peoples in these nations will be snug, complacent, proud and wicked.  They will never really grasp the seriousness of the impending destruction.  With a national leader, like Slick Clinton (if he regains power or merely works in the background) or someone else of equal depravity, the Americans, in particular, will eventually become totally demoralized under the Big Brother imposed dictatorship. 

 

This environment of weakness and moral depravity means that these Anglo-Saxon-Celtic nations will have no defenses (Ezek 7:14; Hos 11:6; Isa 8:9; Jer 21:4-6; Lam 2:3; 4:17).  When, and as it is time to fight, no one is willing to go out and fight (Ezek 7:14).  The wicked people are helpless at the hands of their evil leaders.  They are ready for judgment. 

 

 

The First Strike Decision 

 

Time continues and eventually, around the third month, in likely Yechezkel’s 33d year (perhaps around a year or so after the siege commences), Russia and her Islamic and Third World allies decide that they have wasted enough time, money and energy on the long siege.  They will perceive that the bankrupt America is not about to pay off her foreign debts. 

 

Although it will be apparent that the US and White British Commonwealth nations have no defenses, there probably will be some concern about whether this adversarial alliance can just walk in and take possession of the land and remaining minerals and resources pledged as first mortgages on the huge outstanding debts which America, Canada, Britain etc ran up over the years. 

 

Perhaps, there is some fear that this invading army could suffer some set-backs on entering the besieged lands of Yisrael.  Maybe, this is the reason why there is a decision to launch a nuclear first strike.  Alternatively, there could be other causes which are just as persuasive--like a call to arms and supposed preparation for war in the lands under siege or still something else. 

 

In any case, the Russian and Chinese military leaders will make an estimate of the situation and decide to strike possibly around noon on or about the ninth day of the third month of Yechezkel’s 33d year (Jer 6:4, on the noon reference; otherwise, this dating is determined by the dating of its quick end at II Kg 25:3-4; Hos 5:7; Mic 6:16-7:1; Amos 8:2). 

 

The “Amplified Translation” seems to describe how this attack is carried out in a reference to the “deadly missiles” of the attackers and that the attackers are “heroes,” which bring to mind a resurrected Communist USSR (Jer 5:15-16).  Since America and her White British Commonwealth allies will have no defenses, this attack will be over in one moon or 30 days (Hos 5:7; Mic 6:16-7:1; Amos 8:2). 

 

The attacked nations will be “broken up,” as the prophet put it by the 9th day of the fourth month of probably Yechezkel’s 33d year (II Kg 25:3-4).  Thus ends the formal attack on the US and her blood related allies.  Obviously, there will be remaining radioactive fallout problems.  But otherwise, WWIII is over for all purposes. 

 

No wonder the leaders and big shots and even the little people in the conquered lands will hide themselves in the dens and rocks of the mountains, in the typical fulfillment of Revelation 6:15-16.  Maybe, they are afraid of the enormous fallout (which will cover vast portions of the conquered territories or perhaps fear of the invading armies).  By the 17th day of the fourth month, the land is now in total possession of the conquerors. 

 

 

Bomb Particulars 

 

While the above presentation has focused upon a coming nuclear war, it also must be recognized that the possibilities remain strong that present enemies of America and Britain now have the capability of delivering small, nuclear, suitcase bombs, as acts of terrorism, against these nations anytime starting in Yechezkel’s 30th year and running to the conclusion of the siege in the fourth month of possibly Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

With this background on what will happen in war (as the Scriptures seem to declare) and can happen in a nuclear terrorist attack, the following comments will focus on some technical aspects of a nuclear bomb and nuclear effects of an attack.  

 

The size of a nuclear bomb is known as its yield in an equivalency to pounds of TNT.  The bombs dropped on Japan in WWII were reported to be in the 20 kiloton (KT) area.  Since then, much larger bombs have been developed.  The Soviets tested one a few years ago in the 60 megaton (MT) range. 

 

It is thought that most weapons to be employed would fall into the one to ten megaton level for several reasons.  They are easier to deliver by submarine missiles.  Too, the efficiency of a bomb does not increase that much with size.  Thus, if the bomb size is doubled from say one to two megatons, the effected target area does not double; but rather, only increases in diameter out by about 25%. 

 

There are three primary effects from a nuclear explosion.  They are blast, heat (thermal) and radiation.  The radiation can be of two types--initial or induced and residual in the form of fallout.  Induced radiation does not seem to be a particular problem because any person living near a detonated bomb site will likely die from the thermal and blast effects long before dying from the radiation. 

 

Normally, a fire ball is expected to vaporize all persons within it’s circumference.  There is an enormous blast or shock wave that radiates out from ground zero (the actual point of the explosion).  This wave produces a ripple effect which can extend some distance from ground zero. 

 

 

The Fallout Problem 

 

Fallout arises from the mush-roomed cloud formed with an atomic explosion.  The detonation can pick up some dirt and debris in the blast and suck it up from the ground to help form the well known mush-roomed cloud.  From ground zero, wind patterns can carry this cloud many miles away.  As the distance and rain or snow begin to dissipate the cloud, the now radioactive dust particles return to earth in the form of fallout. 

 

Since fallout is directly linked to prevailing winds, one should take note that the primary wind patterns in the US and Canada blow from West to East in the form of the jet stream.  In the US, they begin drifting in a Northeastern direction as they cross the continent.  In time, the fallout can cover thousands of miles and literally encircle the globe. 

 

While there is this primary motion, local wind patterns can offer differences and particularly in the context of the circular motion of the high and low pressure areas.  In areas in the South-Central US, there is a prevailing wind out of the Gulf of Mexico which blows North. 

 

However, despite the wind variations, one planning a survival retreat area should generally try to become situated to the West of any known target.  The great movie and television drama, called “The Day After,” noted fallout all over the US, except in the Roseburg, Oregon area. 

 

 

Size and Height of Burst 

 

The question of fallout and damage depends to some extent upon two factors--yield and height of burst.  An air burst in the air can offer damage over a larger area than a ground or near ground burst.  But the ground burst is more effective against hard targets like missile silos, submarine bunkers and underground command and control centers. 

 

The choices of what yield and height of burst are made from a number of critical variables--obviously first depending upon what is the target.  A hard target suggests a ground burst and a soft target (like a city or people) indicates an air burst.  Another factor is the question of the accuracy of the delivery system. 

 

For years, the Chinese have had the bomb.  But Western leaders maintained that their missile delivery systems were highly inaccurate.  In that case, the Chinese decision maker would probably opt for a higher yield weapon, in the context that it may not burst precisely at the designated or desired ground zero (DGZ).  If it actually exploded some miles away, hope would remain that it would knock out the target. 

 

But thanks to former President Clinton, the Chinese now have a much more accurate missile guidance system, obtained from America, in exchange for campaign contributions to Slick’s presidential campaign in 1996.  In terms of Chinese missiles striking the US, maybe she can now use smaller weapons than heretofore.  

 

Furthermore, height of burst determines the amount of fallout.  A high air burst produces little or no fallout while a ground burst can cause a large amount of it, depending upon yield and exactly where the burst does occur. 

 

A conqueror planning an invasion with his own army would probably want air bursts (or use neutron bombs which kill people but do not damage infrastructure and are not persistent) wherever possible to avoid the detrimental effects of fallout killing and injuring his own invading soldiers.  In this sense, America’s conquerors might try to focus on air bursts or neutron bombs as much as practical. 

 

 

Choice of Targets 

 

The first choice of a target is a counter-force strike on an enemies’ missile, airplane and submarine facilities.  In the US, these counter-force targets used to be all over America.  Today, they have been pared down substantially to some missile sites in the Central US, a few submarine bases and several SAC bomber bases. 

 

Under the theory of mutual assured destruction (which dominated during most of the cold war), the idea was to launch a first strike upon an enemy and hit his counter-force targets.  Once these targets are destroyed, the possibilities of a counter-attack are greatly diminished. 

 

One should not be naive and suppose that modern man is so civilized, moral and advanced that he would not contemplate a first strike.  During the Cuban missile crisis in 1962, elsewhere described herein, the US Joint Chiefs of Staff recommended a US first strike on the Soviet Union.  Kennedy backed down and decided against it. 

 

The next important targets are command and control centers (like NORAD, at Colorado Springs, and certainly Washington, DC).  US regional centers of government would also be important and conceivably even some state capitols could be chosen. 

 

Other strategic military sites would be next--like bases, ports, supply depots, etc.  Oil refineries and transportation and communication centers would be important (although there is an expected electro-magnetic pulse effect which will knock out most engines and communication devices). 

 

Bridges over the Mississippi would be a key target for any power contemplating an attack on the US.  Knock these bridges out (which also would destroy important cities like New Orleans, Memphis, St. Louis, etc) and the US will be divided into two geographical components.  This would create real problems in attempting to move troops around. 

 

 

Estimated Casualties 

 

Most scientists predict the likelihood of hundreds of millions (or billions) of casualties in a nuclear war.  If it was only in the Northern Hemisphere, much of the Southern Hemisphere could presumably avoid many of the problems with fallout.  But Australia and New Zealand could be targets as well, causing problems down under. 

 

The previously quoted “Breakthrough” Newsletter of the Global Education Associates for the fall of 1983 noted that the two small bombs dropped on Hiroshima and Nagasaki produced 328,000 casualties (about half at once and the other half later from radiation injuries).  Genetically damaged children, grandchildren and great grandchildren are still being born from these blasts. 

 

Even in the absence of nuclear war, millions have still died from the presence of tests and so-called peaceful uses, (as described in a preceding chapter on nuclear pollution).  Nuclear radiation can kill during times of both war and peace. 

 

In the context of the Scriptures, one could be looking at deaths of up to 250 million in North America alone in the context of disease epidemics, famine, nuclear war, fallout, etc.  This writer has been unable to breakdown these deaths from the different sources.  But it is easy to see that 1/3 of the people of the US and Canada could die in the coming nuclear war alone. 

 

 

A Recap of What to Expect 

 

If the Russian and Chinese strike is nuclear (as is described), and if it is very extensive, then there will certainly be massive deaths and injuries, as described above.  Certainly, nuclear war is the implication in the sixth seal of Revelation (in the typical fulfillment) where the nation’s leaders, fat cats and elites hide in the dens and rocks of the earth for some reason (Rev 6:15).  

 

This sounds like what would happen in a nuclear attack upon the US when these captains and leaders run to the underground shelters now prepared for them in certain mountains across America (in the Appalachians and the Rockies).  These underground facilities were specifically built for this reason.  They were addressed in some detail in a previous chapter. 

 

Deadly radioactive fallout will be a continuing problem for quite some time over vast areas of the United States.  Survival will depend upon either being physically situated in a safe geographical area or having an adequate fallout shelter. 

 

Next, one can be sure that almost irrespective of how extensive the nuclear strike is, commercial goods, supplies, food and services will almost instantly vanish.  Grocery shelves will go bare fast and it is very unlikely that they will be replenished anytime soon after D day. 

 

Transportation equipment will no longer be available.  It won’t matter much because gas will also be unavailable. 

 

Any electro-magnetic pulse (EMP) effects will stop all vehicles (both public and private) and none of them may be restored to use before the nation is finally terminated.  In fact, a Russian/Chinese attack will probably start with some EMP blasts to specifically destroy internal US communications and the functioning of all electrical products. 

 

Service stations will be out of gas or run out of gas immediately and close.  Civilian movement and travel, except possibly some limited movement by foot, will become virtually impossible.  Whatever moves that are feasible by foot, or otherwise, could be severely restricted by the government or by military operations. 

 

In mentioning these difficulties of no food, water, electricity, transportation, etc, as will assuredly be manifested during a nuclear attack, the point must be made that probably many of these conditions will surface early in the siege and may not be just a phenomenon following the attack.  In other words, almost everything in society will already be in a crisis state when the bombs go off. 

 

 

The Invasion 

 

The United States will undoubtedly be invaded very soon. The first most logical route of invasion will probably be from the South across the Rio Grande River and the US-Mexican border.  This invasion of Latinos from South of the Rio Grande will likely be coordinated with assaults by sea from Cuba against Florida and/or other portions of the Southeastern United States. 

 

The Russians and Chinese, too, could mount an invasion of the US--more likely from the North through Canada or along the Pacific West coast from bases in Mongolia.  The American East coast remains a possibility, but not as likely as the options from the North, South or West (because of the nuclear fallout problem that will persist over the Eastern United States) 

 

Any Russian or Latin invasion will also probably be coordinated with an internal Marxist revolution that can erupt in many of America's key cities--if those cities survive the nuclear attack.  This revolution could be led by some of the leaders in the present Marxist-Socialist, Black, Brown, Red and Yellow underground organizations trying to overthrow the American government. 

 

Canada will likely experience a similar external fate as the United States, unless a suitable Marxist-Socialist government is installed in power there before the outbreak of WWIII. 

 

There is now some presence of foreign troops and even some pre-positioned supplies and equipment here now (as described previously herein).  Of course, these forces can be coordinated to provide an initial shock force to secure strategic facilities. 

 

In WWII, Germany had pre-positioned materials in Norway.  When the Nazis were ready to strike, they sent in German soldiers posing as civilian tourists.  All the Germans had to do was link up with their supplies and equipment and they had an organized military force on the ground inside Norway when hostilities commenced. 

 

The Russians can do the same thing or perhaps even drop paratroopers in near the equipment.  In any case, it will be no problem to connect Russian soldiers to Russian equipment and supplies now pre-positioned in the US.  In terms of China, one must remember that China now has possession of the Long Beach, CA naval facilities and the Panama Canal.  She could rapidly move people and equipment into the US. 

 

 

The US and Canada Fall 

 

Since both the present American and Canadian governments are soon destined to fall (likely in Yechezkel’s 33d year), it could be a particularly bad and trying time for the general civilian populations, if the transitions in government occur during WWIII. 

 

One must also remember what happened to Jerusalem in the Jewish-Roman War when the Amalekites moved to completely take over the Jewish nation--just before her end.  Since Jerusalem is the ante-type for Yisrael, this course of action seems assured. 

 

Just like the losers (America and Canada) will have declared martial law (perhaps as early as Yechezkel’s 31st or 32d year), the victors will continue with a state of martial law for some time after they take over.  In this environment, a person can be shot for little or no reason whatsoever--by either side. 

 

The evidence is quite persuasive and substantial that most of the North American continent will be in a state of “hades” and crisis for quite some time, once WW III ignites.  Any preparations for survival must be done now and in advance before the war starts.  Once the balloon of war goes up, it will be extremely hard then to make any preparations for survival. 

 

 

Sodom and Gomorrah 

 

Question--what happened almost 4,000 years ago at Sodom and Gomorrah?  Did The MOST HIGH use nuclear weapons of some sort to destroy those sodomite, queer sites (Gen 19:24-28)?  Now that modern America is a replica of ancient Sodom and Gomorrah (Lu 17:28-30), will He intervene in the same way to destroy the US queers? 

 

 

Some Israelites Escape 

 

But despite all of these troubles and mass slaughtering of Israelites, a portion will escape to the city of Jerusalem (or Jordan or a Palestinian state, noted earlier and to be more fully described in comments to follow) before the commencement of the real, great tribulation, as suggested in the earlier outlined scenario of possible events. 

 

It is likely that some Israelites of the House of Yisrael will have the perception of coming trouble and escape even before the final siege starts. 

 

Some Israelites may escape from the House of Yisrael lands before the siege starts, others while the siege is in progress and others perhaps after it ends.  It is unclear how many in total will escape.  But there could be an appreciable number of them (however far less than the ultimate 10% of survivors). 

 

This escaping remnant eventually seems to include the probable 7,000 very elect and likely some part or all of the remaining 137,000 of the election (plus a probable like number of women), as well as a number of wicked sun worshippers (whose escape was discussed in a former presentation in this publication). 

 

 

Jerusalem or Jordan? 

 

In mentioning this escape, the Scriptures seem to repeatedly mention Jerusalem as the goal and objective of these escaping Israelites. 

 

However, in the vein that many of them will be or will have been Christian Identity people, a problem can ensue if the Israelis (under the control of Amalekite bankers/masters) do not allow some of these persons into the state of Israel. 

 

There is some Scriptural evidence allowing for an alternative site for any escaping person unable to reach Jerusalem through the state of Israel.  Historically, the land East of the Jordan (in old Ammon and Moab) proved to be a sanctuary in former times. 

 

David sent his parents to safety there (I Sam 22:3-5).  Persons escaping Jerusalem during the Babylonian siege went to Moab (Jer 40:11).  And during the Jewish-Roman war, Messianic Jews fled to Pella, East of the river (“Dictionary of Judaism in the Biblical Period,” p. 472).  Since the fall of Jerusalem is indicative of the fall of the House of Yisrael, it may be that Jordan is the first destination for many of the escapees. 

 

With the coming Israeli-Arab peace treaty, the Arabs will surely have access to Jerusalem which will likely become an open city. 

 

The Dome of the Rock is too important in Islam for the Arabs to be cut off entirely from Jerusalem.  Such access probably will come from the East into Jerusalem.  Messianic believers in Jordan could go and come to Jerusalem at will--just as is true with the Arabs. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 511--Still More Trouble

 

 

The Opposing Parties in WWIII 

 

About thirty days following the beginning of the nuclear attack (described in the former chapter), the foreign armies of Russia, China, maybe Japan, many Muslim nations (Iran, Iraq, Ethiopia, Libya, Syria, Pakistan, Afghanistan and likely a few others), Latin America (particularly Mexico and Cuba), and perhaps several other Third World countries in Asia and Africa, coupled with possibly some limited participation of one or more European countries (like France and maybe even Germany or Greece), should begin their invasion of the US and the White British Commonwealth, as mentioned above. 

 

 

Developments 

 

Incidentally, developments in 2001 spelled out the reality that, indeed, the Third World Black and Brown countries are coming together with the Muslim empire to form a huge, colossal entity.  This condition was subtly brought out in a series of news reports in the Dec 2001 “American Sentinel” (p. 4) that reflected upon some unknown facts associated with the Sep 11, 2001, Muslim attack on the US--viz: 

 

On Aug 29 (13 days before the attack), an anonymous letter to Radio Cayman said that three Afghan nationals had recently arrived in Grand Cayman from Cuba.  They were reportedly “agents of Osama Bin Laden...and are organizing a major terrorist attack against the U.S. via airlines.”  According to UPI, the Afghans had $2 million in cash. 

 

As early as the year 2000, Cuban agents met with al Qaeda leader Mohammed Atta in the US (Jan 2002 “American Sentinel,” p. 11).  And on Mar 2, 2001, an AP report said that two Cuban officials were present at al Qaeda training camps in Afghanistan. 

 

In May 2001, Castro visited Syria, Iran and Libya.  On the trip, he issued a declaration from Iran which said that “together Iran and Cuba will bring the United States to its knees.” 

 

In Oct 2000, Carlos Lage, a senior Castro associate, traveled to Iran to inaugurate a biotechnical research and development facility.  As early as 1999, Dr Ken Alibek, a former deputy chief of Soviet bioweapons development noted that the Castro regime “has produced biological weapons since 1991.” 

 

In Aug 2001, the FBI arrested two Cuban spies in Florida.  One of them was working at a US postal service processing center at Miami’s airport.  The FBI position was that the two Cubans were just interested in US “postal efficiency.” 

 

The point of all this is that there could be a connection and particularly in view of the anthrax attacks through the US mails in 2001 (although US authorities have continued to maintain that the US anthrax attacks in 2001 involved someone in America). 

 

 

The Leopard 

 

This configuration of the kings of the East and the Black Africans should not be confused at this stage of the game in 2003 with the ultimately coming leopard empire made up of essentially the same nations for the Gog and Magog event that happens after YESHUA returns (Ezek 38-39; Dan 7:6; Rev 20:7-10). 

 

This coming leopard world power (yellow with black spots, to be further described in later remarks) will clearly involve the kings of the East and certain other Colored peoples (like the Muslim nations, Black Africa and probably India). 

 

While this present combining power is not the leopard beast, per se, it manifestly represents the beginning formation of the eventual leopard beast and the basis for the later Gog and Magog attack. 

 

So while the leopard and the Gog and Magog conspiratorial powers are probably largely intact in some configuration for WWIII and the destruction of the House of Yisrael nations, the actual prophetic fulfillment for these powers and events is still future after WWIII. 

 

 

India? 

 

This coming overall leopard beast seems clear enough--as surely involving Asians (like China, Japan, Korea, Southeast Asia, etc) in an evident alliance with Muslims. Latin Americans and Black Africaners).  Logically, India must be a part of this ultimate leopard beast. 

 

But by including India in the ultimate beast, there is some question about its inclusion with the Russian-Chinese-Muslim-Latin alliance for WWIII.  The problem is that historically China has had ties with Pakistan and the Muslims.  India has been at odds with Pakistan and the Muslims for almost her entire history.  It will be some problem to tie India together with the Muslims at this time (though it surely will happen in time). 

 

A good illustration of the problem with India surfaced in the Feb 3, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 13) in a story by Mike Blair on “Russia, U.S. Turn Blind Eye to India’s Nuclear Buildup.”  The point of this story was that India is building up her own power system to ostensibly offset Red China and the Muslims (with help from the US and possibly Russia). 

 

One must remember that while India is not as big as China, she is almost as big in terms of both geography and population.  So, if the US particularly is helping India in 2003, one must wonder whether India would so soon join with the Muslims and China for an attack on the US.  Actually, it seems questionable. 

 

Therefore, the essence of current events would seem to suggest that India may or may not be a willing partner with Russia, China, the Muslims. the Latinos and much of the rest of the Colored world in the present configuration to take on the House of Yisrael nations.  Likely, India will be a part of this combine later for Yechezkel 38-39; but maybe not right now for WWIII. 

 

 

The Rest of the World 

 

While Continental Europe will probably be largely neutral in this coming WWIII (with the nuclear attack and ground invasion), she will not be friends and allies of the Anglo-Saxon-Celtics in the US and White British Commonwealth and/or the state of Israel in this coming showdown.  In short, Russia, Asia, Latin America, Black Africa and the Islamic world will be the primary antagonists, as just outlined. 

 

The rest of the world will either be on the side of the attackers or neutral in the conflict against the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic peoples and the Israelis.  This condition of the US, the White British nations and the state of Israel standing alone against the world seems to be developing with the events of 1998-2003, as described elsewhere herein. 

 

The public will surely perceive this anti-Anglo foreign alliance as the age ending Beast power which may even have some plausible vocal support from possibly the first pair of Yisrael’s two prophets (Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu?), discussed earlier (in the sense of them being an ante-type of the real two witnesses, who will publicly follow the possible first two prophets by some time span from a few days up to perhaps three years or so). 

 

Likely, these first two prophets will correctly report that the Russian alliance and work will represent a judgment from YHWH.  In that sense, the attackers will be YAH’s servants ordained to punish the United States and other Anglo-Saxon-Celtic nations (although they won’t be the Beast power to come, as many Christians will incorrectly believe). 

 

 

The Internal Problems 

 

When this showdown materializes, all of these Colored Third World nations will have instant allies in the form of Colored Americans.  In other words, the great Colored immigration into America and Britain will ultimately backfire on the White Anglo-Saxon-Celtic peoples, who allowed it, encouraged it, supported it and desired it. 

 

The ancestors of the White Americans and Britons made a mistake in their immigration actions years ago--a mistake which will prove to be very costly for their descendants.  This means that Black, Hispanic, Muslim and Asian Americans and Britons will be more on the side of the opposition than they will be on the side of White Americans and Britons.  Thus, America and Britain will be strongly divided internally. 

 

Even the many Indians (from India), Greeks, Spaniards, Italians, Southern Europeans, Eastern Europeans and most other foreigners in general will find that all of a sudden they don’t like being Americans or Britons.  They will be in no mood to defend this land--which really doesn’t belong to them (it belonged to them for benefits, blessings and welfare, it just won’t belong to them when judgment comes). 

 

Therefore, all the peoples in America and the White British Commonwealth who don’t fit into the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic definition (and perhaps the Germanic peoples category, to some extent) will choose to either join in with the attacking enemies, or at least stay neutral with a hope of returning to their ancestral lands overseas.  Hence, the Greeks will go back to Greece, the Italians will return to Italy, the Indians will flee to India, etc. 

 

 

The Prophesied Division of the Land 

 

One of the interesting strategies which the Russians have held onto for their future war with America is a planned division of the United States into specific military districts or zones of occupation (“Origins of the 4th World War,” p. 211). 

 

This planning is important because prophetically Yisrael was promised a division of her land to her conquerors in her age ending destruction (Dan 11:39; Amos 7:17; Mic 2:4).  Also, there is a prophetic implication of the allocation of these divided lands to various and sundry behemah and nokri/nekar peoples, as was the ante-type with the transfer by Assyria of the lands of Yisrael to the Cutheans (II Kg 17:24). 

 

Some persons reading these prophecies of the division of the land of Yisrael to certain strangers may confuse this eventuality with the words of Yeshayahu when he declared that the coming punishment upon the land and nation of Yisrael would continue--until the land was without inhabitant and the houses without man and the land be utterly desolate, after YHWH has removed men from the land (Isa 6:11-12). 

 

The English words man/men in both of these verses are from the Hebrew Adam--referring to the Adamite descendants in the land and not necessarily to the behemah and nokri/nekar personages. 

 

This first phrase on the land being without inhabitant seems to involve the familiar Hebrew parallelism where a statement is made and then repeated with a clarification or slightly different twist.  In verse 11, the second remark, on the houses without Adamites, seems to be an enhancement and restatement of the pervious comment on the inhabitants. 

 

 

More on the Land Divisions 

 

Thus, the best view seems to be that all of the Adamic peoples will be removed from the land.  If, by chance, this text implies all humans/humanoids, then it is probable that it is related to only part of the removals and not necessarily all of them.  Therefore, part of the land might be totally desolate of so-called human beings while other parts of it may have behemah, chaiyah and nokri/nekar aliens present. 

 

Probably, in the division of the land, the behemah, chaiyah and nokri/nekar humanoids will take possession of some or most of the land divisions, while maybe the White Christian Israelites are removed to one final portion of the land temporarily to await their final and complete removal from the land of Yisrael later. 

 

In the two ante-types of the removal of Yisrael from the land (the House of Yisrael by the Assyrians and the House of Yehudah by the Babylonians), all of the land was never truly vacant and desolate (although some part of it may have been).  True, Israelites were totally removed.  But aliens, like the Cutheans, moved into the North and the evil Amalekites moved into the South. 

 

In any case, the land will be divided and the Israelites/Adamites will be totally removed.  Apparently, behemah, chaiyah and nokri/nekar aliens will then inhabit part or all of the land. 

 

Thus, this lost war will mean a division of the United States and her British relatives.  For years, the Blacks have been promised by the American Communists, and now the Black Muslims, a Black American homeland made up of the Old South states (AL, MS, GA, SC, NC, VA, LA, AR, and TN).  They will get it.  Florida goes to Cuba since the US got it from Spain. 

 

 

The Mexican Conquest 

 

The Southwest territory (much of CA to TX), annexed by the US in the 1847-48 Mexican War, will see the return of those lands to Mexico.  This course was briefly mentioned in a former presentation.  Already, there is a serious insurgency movement among Chicano radicals for the return of this land to Mexico. 

 

This movement is called “Reconquista” (reconquest).  Its plans call for the establishment of a Mexican state called Aztlan in the US Southwest (per “Mexican Invasion Comparable to War,” by Andrew Arnold, Mar 6, 1998, “Spotlight”).  To speed up this US motion back to Mexico, the Mexican government passed a law on Mar 20, 1998, which allows Mexican Americans to hold dual citizenship--US and Mexican. 

 

As noted above and in prior chapters, the US has been extremely stupid for allowing a Colored Mexican invasion of illegal immigrants over a period of years since WWII.  Every few years, the Congress passes laws to legalize literally millions of illegal Hispanics who earlier had flowed into the US. 

 

President Bush has consistently supported the latest plan to legalize all illegal aliens in America.  After the 9-11 terrorist incidents, this idea was put on the back-burner for awhile (because of the involvement of some illegal aliens).  However now, per the Dec 9, 2002, “American Free Press” (p. 10), the plan has been revived. 

 

US Ambassador Tony Garza told Mexicans in Mexico City that the granting of amnesty to illegal immigrants in America continues to be a priority in the Bush administration.  So, along with possessing Mexican citizenship, millions of illegal Mexicans will soon have US citizenship, per the plans of George W. Bush. 

 

 

More on the Insurgency Movements 

 

Former Mexican President Zedillo got into the act by proclaiming that “We will not tolerate foreign forces dictating and enacting laws on Mexicans in the U.S.  I have proudly affirmed that the Mexican nation extends beyond the territory enclosed by its borders and that Mexican immigrants are an important, a very important part of it” (May-Jun 2000 “Intelligence Newsletter,” p. 6). 

 

In the US, violent Mexican racialist groups have been organized called “La Raza” (the Race).  Their motto is “for the race, everything; outside the race, nothing” (May-Jun 1998 “Intelligence Newsletter,” p. 3).  These Mexican groups are allied with the drug cartels for financing (since part of the drug business is in the hands of Latinos). 

 

This same “Intelligence Newsletter” (p. 4) quoted a Voice of Citizens Together meeting in California where James Wainscoat of Santa Cruz said that the Chicano insurgency movement is using Mexican street gangs as fronts in their quest for the US Southwest territories. 

 

In view of the actions of the Chinese to bring assault weapons in for the Latin street gangs (with Clinton’s approval), it is evident that the future attack on America will include these street gangs. 

 

 

The Latest 

 

For some time now, there have been reports of Chinese and other foreign troops deployed in Northern Mexico, near the US border.  Along with this foreign presence, another interesting thing happened in May 2002 when Mexican soldiers started violating the US border. 

 

This story surfaced in news items in the May 27, 2002, and June 10, 2002, issues of “American Free Press” (p. 2, and p. 12) which said that the US Border Patrol had documented some 117 incidents where armed Mexican soldiers crossed the US border.  Some of the US concern has been that these soldiers accompany and protect drug carriers operating along the border. 

 

The June 10, 2002, “American Free Press” (p. 1, 12) had an article by Mike Blair on “Mexican Soldiers Again Fire Upon U.S. Border Patrol.”  Blair cited a case on May 17, 2002, where some of these border violating Mexican soldiers fired upon a border patrol agent in Arizona.  As Blair pointed out, this was not the first such shooting incident. 

 

Beyond the obvious adverse implications of the border violations and the attacks on border patrol people, could there still be some other more serious implications?  Could these border incidents be paving the way for a future Latino invasion of the Gringo lands when WWIII erupts? 

 

 

Mexican Leaders Speak Out 

 

Representative Antonio Villaraigosa, speaker of the California assembly, is one of the leaders who has spoken out on the return of the US Southwest to Mexico.  He supports a group which lists “the liberation of (the US Southwest), meaning self determination of our people in this occupied state and the physical liberation of our land” (Jan 17, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 11). 

 

According to Glenn Spencer, president of the Voice of Citizens Together, “Mr. Villaraigosa’s positions and affiliations leave no doubt that he supports the Mexican Reconquista.  Under his leadership, we will see the acceleration of the Mexican takeover of California and the American Southwest” (Jan 17, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 11). 

 

The “Spotlight” of Feb 21, 2000 (p. 1, 4), had a follow-up story by Margo Turner on “Expert Predicting Takeover of Southwest U.S.” which focused upon the ideas of Charles Truxillo, a professor of Chicano studies at the University of New Mexico.  Truxillo envisions a “El Republica del Norte” (Republic of the North) made up of several of the Northern Mexican states, plus much of the Southwest US. 

 

The professor says that the capitol of this new Hispanic republic will be in Los Angeles.  While he allows that it could come into being through the political process, he is not ruling out the prospects of a war to create it.  

 

Juan Hernandez, head of the federal government’s Office of Mexicans Living Outside of Mexico (this office sounds incredible, but it appears that it has been established to oversee the affairs of Mexicans living in the US), told Congressman Tom Tancredo (R-CO) that the Southwest US and Northern Mexico “is not two countries, it’s just a region” (Jul 1, 2002, “American Free Press,” p. 2). 

 

The Mexican plans for the Southwestern US was summed up by Mario Obledo, Chairman of the California Coalition of Hispanic Organizations and winner of the 1998 US Presidential Medal of Freedom (given by Clinton).  Obledo said-- “California is going to be a Hispanic state and anyone who doesn’t like it should leave” (Dec 1999 “Internet Vortex,” p. 22). 

 

In a later interview, Obledo was asked if he made the above statement.  He said “I did” and added-- “If they (referring to White Americans in California) don’t like Mexicans, they ought to go back to Europe” (Dec 25, 2000, “Spotlight,” p. 1). 

 

 

Still More Divisions 

 

So-called native Americans (American Indians) in portions of the United States have long had a number of motions designed to take back their land from the White eyes.  In Oklahoma, there is a powerful “Nighthawk” movement among Indians.  Elsewhere, the American Indian Movement (AIM) intends to take back much of the central plains. 

 

The Russians will get back Alaska, part of the Pacific Coast and other strategic areas of the North American continent. The Japanese will get Hawaii and many Pacific Islands (the Marianas, Wake, etc). 

 

Obviously, these divisions will not escape Canada where large areas will go to the Indians.  Quebec is definitely going to be French. 

 

China gets Australia, likely New Zealand and perhaps a portion of the US West coast (thanks to them for making campaign contributions to Slick Clinton).  When Slick took Chinese money, agreements were made for them to get certain war making technology from the US (just like before WWII, the US shipped war materials to Japan), the Panama Canal and who knows what else. 

 

In any case, with the military technology from the US, it will not have mattered what Clinton promised China (in exchange for her campaign contributions to him) because when the showdown conflict eventually erupts, China will come in and take whatever else she wants--subject only to the over-riding wishes of her Russian, Muslim and other Third World allies. 

 

The Republic of Ireland gets Northern Ireland and the Channel Islands go to France.  The rest of Great Britain will ultimately be divided to her conquerors.  Perhaps Wales and Scotland may be placed under a United Europe protectorate of some type. 

 

With all of this coming division, there won’t be much undivided territory left in the former great Anglo-Saxon-Celtic lands. 

 

If the Northeastern US is covered with radioactive fallout (as is likely), perhaps the Midwest will be used as a temporary staging area to gather the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic peoples to await their further removal later.  Likely, there will be a similar area in Britain and the other conquered lands. 

 

In particular, the surviving (and there won’t be many people in this category) White Anglo-Saxon-Celtic peoples in England, the United States, Australia, Canada, New Zealand, etc will face slavery and deportation from their lands.  As discussed elsewhere herein, they will not be allowed to stay long in those lands in the future. 

 

 

An Unprecedented Time of Trouble 

 

In the present environment of so-called “peace and safety,” it is extremely difficult to envision this time of trouble coming upon the House of Yisrael.  The problem is that Yisrael for 2,700 years (following the Assyrian conquests in Canaan land) has never seen or experienced any sense of the trial that will come during Yakov’s Trouble of seven years.  

 

These will be horrible days which will be the worst ever to befall on Adam man in the 6,000 years history of Adam.  The book of Lamentations gives the best description of those times. 

 

One must always remember, the trouble that fell historically on Jerusalem was but an example of what is to come on the House of Yisrael in the age end.  Lamentations tells us about what happened to the House of Yehudah when the Babylonians conquered Jerusalem. 

 

Otherwise, perhaps a “little” semblance of what is to come on Yisrael can be visually comprehended from the 1965 hit movie “Doctor Zhivago,” based upon the work of Boris Pasternak, in his informative great novel and first hand witness of the period of the 1917 Russian Revolution and thereafter.  This Pasternak story is excellent and the movie is realistic. 

 

The only problem with this production is that it is all child’s play compared to what will actually befall the House of Yisrael--particularly Ephraim first, Manasseh second, and eventually the whole age ending House of Yisrael. 

 

The Nazi crackdown on the Jews in Europe in WWII would also be indicative of what is to come upon Christian Israelites.  The coming terror and horror will be the worst of all time.

 

The ELOHIM is determined to rule over Yisrael.  He is fully committed to a future New or Renewed Covenant (marriage) with Yisrael and one in which the House of Yisrael learns for the first time in her history the need and necessity to take His laws (the Torah) seriously.  Yisrael must and indeed will learn to stop sinning (violating the Torah) from The ELOHIM decreed punishment and chastisement of Yakov’s Trouble. 

 

 

A Modern Parallel With Yehudah

 

In drawing a parallel between the modern House of Yisrael nations and the former remnant of the House of Yehudah in Jerusalem in Second Temple days (as suggested at Ezek 4:3), it is manifest that Amalek-Edomites have been largely in control of both peoples--particularly, in the century immediately preceding the military conquest and end of both entities. 

 

The reason for this Edomite (or evidently, more correctly--Amalekite) control is outlined in Piska 3, previously discussed.  This outstanding source from the early Palestinian synagogues reports that Yisrael must be ever mindful of the fact that her own misdeeds can bring on the scourge of Amalek (“Pesikta De-Rab Kahana,” p. 37). 

 

Going on, Piska three says that Yisrael must repent of her own sins or otherwise, Amalek will again impose servitude upon the Israelites (ibid, p. 37).  Actually, this very thing happened in the first century CE to the House of Yehudah and now in the 20th and 21st centuries to the House of Yisrael nations. 

 

Just as Yehudah was extremely sinful and rebellious in the first century CE, the House of Yisrael nations have been incredibly evil, wicked and rebellious for almost all of the 20th century CE (and into the 21st century).  Surely, modern Christian Israelites are just as evil or probably even more evil than the Jewish Israelites of the first century CE.  Howbeit, there is a parallel between the two peoples (as Yechezkel allowed). 

 

Since the controlling Amalek-Edomites were so crafty and treacherous in Yehudah in c66-70 CE, as described and discussed at length in previous chapters, is it also possible that history will record a similar situation with the House of Yisrael nations as they face their final judgment from YHWH? 

 

Is it possible that the controlling Amalek-Edomites will actually be instruments to cause the coming end of Yisrael when YHWH’s servants (the modern Assyrians) begin their siege and assault on Yisrael?  Is that the reason that the previously mentioned quotation from the Dead Sea Scroll fragment mentions Edom in the alliance against Yisrael? 

 

But it is also extremely possible that this Dead Sea Scroll reference to Edom in this age ending configuration could be directed at the Irish and Muslim Edomite (non-Arab) nations (like Turkey, Albania, etc).  Possibly, the real Edomite control over the House of Yisrael rests just with the Amalekites, which will be next addressed in Psalms 83. 

 

 

Psalms 83, Revisited 

 

Other comments herein outline a coming confederation of most or all of the old enemies of Yisrael, joined together in the age end in a final alliance to destroy the people of Yisrael and blot out the name of Yisrael from history’s remembrance (Ps 83:4). 

 

This alliance is important because it includes Assyria (Russia and/or Germany?), Moab (France or French Canadians?), Philistia (Spain and Latin Americans?) and the nations of the Ishmaelites (the Arab countries) along with Edom, in the generic sense, and Amalek (Khazars?), in particular. 

 

Probably, some of the (non-Arab) Muslim Edomites (like Turkey, Albania and possibly modern Iran and Pakistan) and the Irish and Southern Italians will be in this alliance.  But the Amalekites (previously described) will likely have a more significant role to play in this planned destruction of Yisrael. 

 

The “Soncino Books of the Bible” (v. x, p. 272) had some relevant remarks to offer on this coming alliance.  In the references to The ELOHIM not keeping silence and to His people (Ps 83:1, 3), Soncino notes that intervention by YHWH is urgently needed and the obligation to not remain passive rests upon Him. 

 

This text makes reference to the counsel of this conspiracy against The ELOHIM’s “treasured ones” (hidden ones in the KJV, Ps 83:3).  Soncino suggests that these treasured or hidden ones refer to those whom The ELOHIM hides in His covert, as a protection from danger (ibid, v. x, p. 272). 

 

It appears that the Scriptural references to these hidden ones or treasured ones tie to the very elect category of persons of Philadelphia, as was described in a prior chapter.  In effect, it seems that it is this evil confederation against these very elect that actually prompts The MOST HIGH to become very indignant.  Ultimately, He intervenes to protect them (and not generic Yisrael). 

 

 

More Possible Interpretations 

 

What this could amount to is that in this initial trouble coming upon the House of Yisrael nations to unite the four horns, previously discussed; the start of the seven years of Yakov’s Trouble; and the arrival of WWIII; the Amalek-Edomites in control of the House of Yisrael nations will likely be initially allied (in some manner) with Russia and the Third World alliance.  

 

Since this alliance is largely a Communist alliance, it might be that these Amalekites (apparently modern Khazars) are allied with the Communists for a long period of years (yes, red Edom and red Communism).  In this duration of years, the Amalekites and their Communist colleagues have been or will be united in opposition to Israelites generally and to the very elect in particular. 

 

Surely, it will be the Amalekites who supply the agitation and the push to bring on the final confrontation between the House of Yisrael nations and the four horn powers and their allies.  The Amalekite control of the House of Yisrael nations will prompt them to arrest and persecute surviving and present members of YHWH’s election (to include the very elect, starting with the Christian Identity movement). 

 

At some point in time, there probably will be or will have been a falling out between the Amalekite rulers of Yisrael and their former comrades in Moscow and the Third World countries involved in the four horns (did this happen in the 1950s or later--but assuredly, by Yechezkel’s 33d year). 

 

Probably, this falling out (over specifically the Zionist movement, the Jewish presence in Palestine and the international debt positions of the House of Yisrael nations) builds up in the age end and precipitates WWIII and the attack on the Yisrael nations.  Thus, by the time of the attack, the Amalekites (as supposed allies of Yisrael) will possibly be enemies of the four horns and their colleagues. 

 

 

The Parallel 

 

If the parallel between the fall of Jerusalem to the Babylonians, mentioned earlier, and to the Romans, as outlined in a prior chapter, holds (as it should per Ezek 4:3), it then is a certainty that the age ending Amalekite Jews will be actively oppressing people in the age ending House of Yisrael nations (starting with Christian Identity persons). 

 

Perhaps, in time, the diabolical Amalekite Jews will murder the Israelite political leaders and try to formally take over the government--just as they chose to take over the Jerusalem government in 66-70 CE with the pending Roman threat.  As noted earlier, there probably will be a falling out between leaders of the caliber of Clinton and the Amalekite Jew bankers/masters. 

 

Furthermore, by the time that the four horns and their allies take physical possession of the House of Yisrael nations (following their victory, which will be YHWH’s judgment), these conquering horns perhaps may gain some favorable feelings or reactions toward surviving members of the election then rotting in Yisrael’s jails as politically persecuted minorities. 

 

Maybe, The MOST HIGH will intervene in the minds and mentalities of these conquering Russians, Chinese, Iranians and others to motivate them to release some of Yisrael’s political prisoners and to quickly turn on the sun worship religion and religious leaders of the House of Yisrael--to commence an ante-type of the great tribulation on them (as elsewhere discussed). 

 

Although there is some uncertainty on how this might occur, it is plausible that some members of the election (especially the very elect) still in the Diaspora or in the former House of Yisrael lands probably will escape now and be able to go to Jerusalem and join up with other Israelites (as the remnant), who had migrated to Palestine earlier. 

 

Evidently, just before (or possibly during or just after) the fall of the House of Yisrael (Ezek 4-7; Rev 6:13), a great earthquake, an eclipse of the sun (Rev 6:12-17) and the move of some Israelites to safety in Jerusalem (perhaps then an open city), the magnificent sealing of the 144,000 election takes place (Ezek 9:4; Rev 7:1-8). 

 

The elect Israelites in this returning remnant will be privileged to help in the rebuilding of the Third Temple on Mount Moriah (Hag 1:14; 2:1-3, 10-20; Zech 1:1-3; Mal 3:1) and help the four carpenters or builders on the scene (Zech 1:20-21; Mal 3-4; Rev 11:1-8).  Evidently, the first 3 1/2 years period of the last heptad will see a fantastic restoration of true worship--at least, among the very elect in Jerusalem. 

 

 

Dead Sea Scrolls, Revisited 

 

The NT does a good job in bringing out some measure of identification and description of the key players in the age end configuration.  NT readers know them as the Beast ruler and two horned beast or false prophet (assuredly the Pope) of Revelation 13, the dragon or man of sin; and of course, The MESSIAH and the two witnesses. 

 

In a whole host of writings, the Qumran people (evidently Essenes, who used the scrolls) also recognized the age end players in apparently the same distribution (“The Dead Sea Scrolls, A New Translation,” p. 220-234).  Of course, Satan (in the context of Bell) and The MESSIAH are both often mentioned. 

 

Otherwise, a Commentary on the Psalms makes reference to the Man of the Lie and the Wicked Priest (“The Dead Sea Scrolls, A New Translation,” p. 220).  Who are these two dispensers of evil?  Could the Wicked Priest relate to the two horned false preacher (the Pope) and the Man of the Lie link to the Beast ruler who is a man of the lie, per Daniel 11 (see also Rev 13)? 

 

Moreover, the Dead Sea Scrolls frequently mention the Teacher of Righteousness and A Commentary on the Last Days mentions “the Interpreter of the Law” (“The Dead Sea Scrolls, A New Translation,” p. 226).  An initial impression of this interpreter of the law, in the context of the age end, would suggest that he is one of the real two witnesses. 

 

While the Teacher of Righteousness typically appears as a historic figure in the Qumran writings, he also was to re-appear in a future role in the age end.  Manifestly, the Teacher of Righteousness in a age ending configuration would likely be one of the genuine two witnesses. 

 

Without being dogmatic on these possible correlations, it has to be significant that the writers of the Qumran scrolls were able to read and study the Tanakh prophecies and come up with some of the same age ending characters which also appear in the NT, but under different names and/or titles. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 512--And More Tests and Trials

 

 

The Start of Trouble for America With Yosef’s Tomb? 

 

Per the request of Yosef, the children of Yisrael brought his bones with them when they left Egypt and buried them in Shechem--in a field that had been purchased by Yakov Yisrael (Josh 24:32).  Whether Yosef was in the Passover resurrection or not is unclear.  Anyway, this tomb has come to be a important kodesh site for over 3,400 years.  In modern Israel, it has been a Jewish “holy” site. 

 

When the Israelis evacuated Shechem (modern Nablus), in the summer of 2000, the Palestinian Authority (PA or PLA) was supposed to safeguard and protect the site.  Instead, when the current Intifada broke out (about Bul 1), Palestinian gunmen and civilians soon seized the site, trashed Jewish books, set the complex on fire and generally desecrated it (Oct 13, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 4). 

 

Later, the Palestinians began refurbishing Yosef’s tomb as an Islamic mosque (by Bul 15).  They painted the dome of the tomb green (the Moslem color) and brought in bulldozers to clear the surrounding area.  Jews were told that they no longer could worship there until an international group decides whether the site belongs to the Muslims or the Jews (Oct 20, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 4). 

 

The importance of this story is to make a student of Yisrael Identity stop, pause and reflect on the profound impact of this event.  The Anglo-Saxon-Celtic descendants of Yosef (evidently in the United States and Canada, described in prior chapters) sat back and allowed this whole Moslem action to take place.  Surely, this tomb should be one of the most important kodesh sites of all to Yosef’s descendants in the world. 

 

Yet, modern Americans and Canadians generally sat back and did nothing about the desecration of the tomb of their progenitor.  Most of them were more concerned about the stock market, eating at a local restaurant, enjoying sex and generally making money and pursuing the so-called good life. 

 

 

Significance? 

 

Hence, the question must be asked--could this event be indicative or prophetic of coming trouble for the descendants of Yosef, as the Islamic world joins in with Russia, China and other nations to ultimately destroy America, Canada and the rest of the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic West?  In fact, was this the beginning or first signs of the end for modern Yosef and Yisrael? 

 

The evil associated with Shechem was discussed in former chapters.  Per the Talmud and Jewish tradition, Shechem is the place where bad things happen and the place set aside for punishment. 

 

In the Jan-Feb 2001 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 10-13), William F. Dankenbring quoted the Zohar (Vayakhel 220a) and other Jewish sources that suggest that (Shechem) in Yosef’s territory will be the first place destroyed and where (trouble) will begin and spread to other nations.  Dankenbring then asked if the Muslim attack upon Yosef’s tomb was the beginning of Yakov’s Trouble? 

 

 

Recent Jewish Thinking 

 

The breakout of the Muslim Intifada in 2000 (to be discussed in later chapters) has caused some Jewish religious leaders to take a more careful look at events and offer their current thinking.  In the May-Jun 2001 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 2, 24-25), William F. Dankenbring offered this motion in an article on “Orthodox and Hassidic Rabbonim Declare Time of Yakov’s Trouble.” 

 

The essence of this story is that some 27 leading Jewish “rabbis” have declared that the year of 2001 is the start of Yakov’s Trouble (noted earlier).  Jews around the world have been asked to pray to The HIGHEST for forgiveness, mercy, and deliverance from the woes assailing Jews and the Jewish state of Israel. 

 

This proclamation was kicked off at the Western Wall on March 23, 2001 (Adar II 28), when the Rabbonim and religious Jews from yeshivas, synagogues and religious schools throughout Israel assembled for the sounds of the shofar, singing of Hebrew Psalms, repentance and the declaration of the “Gedolei Yisrael” (Great Ones of Yisrael) formally recognized the beginning of Yakov’s Trouble.    

 

The declaration said “It is a troubled time for Ya’acov but he will be saved... Israel, the holy nation, is experiencing a time of suffering.  Wicked people are launching attacks against our people, and are intent on causing trouble for the Jews in the Holy Land. 

 

“May HaShem safeguard the Jewish nation in Eretz Hakodesh (the holy land) from the wicked machinations of our enemies.  May He protect us from the oppressive calamities which crush body and soul.  May He grant succor to those who suffer from severe and bitter illnesses.  May He save us from the terrible plague in the form of traffic accidents.  May He ease the pain of the hearts which grieve over the spiritual degeneration in our times, and over the decline in the belief of our sacred Torah. 

 

“Our only power is in exercising of the age-old tool of our fathers, which is to cry out and to cause an uproar, as the Rambam says at the beginning of Hilchos Taanis:  It is a positive command of the Torah to cry out and to sound the shofar over every calamity, which strikes the community, as it is written, ‘At hatsar hastsoreir eschem veharei’osem bechatzotzeros’ (against the adversary that oppresses you, you should blow an alarm with the trumpets--Numbers 10:9)--the word tsar alluding to everything which oppresses (metsar) you. 

 

“Therefore, we entreat Jews everywhere--men, women and children--to assemble at worldwide prayer rallies and to plead with the Almighty, Who is most compassionate and kind, for deliverance...” 

 

While the essence of Yakov’s Trouble seems to be upon the House of Yisrael initially and primarily, it is fascinating that the Jews are taking notice of it in terms of their plight.  Of course, this event must have some significance. 

 

 

Bul 15 in 2000 and US Economic Problems   

 

This writer has been curious about Bul 15 or soon thereafter for a long time for trouble to strike the US--because this was when Jeroboam first set up sun worship in Yisrael.  Historically, the stock market and financial problems occurred near Bul 15 in 1929 and 1987.  On Bul 15, in 2000, the Dow-Jones stock average fell 379 points, oil futures went out of the sky to $37 a barrel and the USS Cole was bombed. 

 

Did events on Bul 15 of 2000 signal the start of the collapse of the global financial markets and the US dollar?  Possibly, the answer is yes (though the Amalekites evidently used the market control unit and massive US dollars to try to reflate the market over the next several months.  The market control unit was described in a preceding chapter). 

 

Incidentally, the US stock markets topped out in early 2000.  On January 14, 2000, the Dow Jones hit its high of 11,723 points.  The NASDAQ hit its high on March 10, 2000, with 5048 points.  There was some trouble in April (the markets fell on Apr 14, 2000); but generally, the Amalekites were able to manipulate and control the markets for the next several months. 

 

There was some recovery by Ethanim 2000.  However, the Bul 15, 2000, break was significant and it demonstrated that the Fed (by spending gobs of Federal Reserve Notes) could not reflate the markets.  The Bul decline continued thereafter--although there were some up days (apparently, when the Fed rushed in and spent US Federal Reserve Notes).  But the overall trend was down after Bul 15. 

 

Clearly, the US elections on Nov 7, 2000, created a crisis which contributed to foreign concern and caused an uproar in America, as the uncertainty intensified over the succeeding days.  The fall-out of the US elections was addressed in previous chapters.  Thus, stock market troubles continued throughout the rest of 2000 and into 2001, 2002 and early 2003.  These troubles will be addressed in comments hereafter. 

 

 

More Trouble 

 

In the early 10th Scriptural moon of 2000 (around Dec 1, 2000), Grand Mufti Nasr Farid Wasel (Egypt’s Chief Moslem cleric) ruled that commercial importers of American and Israeli products were committing “a great sin” (Dec 8, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 4). 

 

By the 10th day of the 10th month, Muslim countries throughout the world had instituted formal boycotts of US goods (covered on a NPR news broadcast on Dec 11, 2000). 

 

In December 2000, the Arab oil producers announced that they would cut oil production (to drive up prices).  These events will combine to drive the US balance of payments deficit into the sky (in 2000, it was running over $30 billion per month; by early 2003, it was reaching in excess of $40 billion monthly). 

 

Consequently, on this beginning of trouble, the question must surface as to whether this economic boycott will turn into an eventual Islamic embargo (especially oil) against America (to more nearly fulfill the possibilities of what happened to the House of Yehudah by the Babylonians in c556 BCE, discussed earlier). 

 

Next, some interesting things have been happening in Britain.  Starting around the 1st day of the 10th month (about Nov 28, 2000), the Guardian newspaper and other liberal figures began a process of trying to undercut and abolish the monarchy (discussed by BBC on Dec 6, 2000).  This issue is now before the British public and may become serious when Elizabeth dies.

 

One group of liberals have claimed that the monarchy is discriminatory in that a Catholic cannot inherit the throne. Another group complained over the Anglican Church’s connection with the British monarchy (in the church-state tie).  It is interesting that this present discussion and building conflict started around the 1st day of the 10th month.  Of course, it can take some substantial time to finally play out. 

 

 

And More Trouble 

 

The fall of 2000 saw another most extraordinary development in Britain which may ultimately have a most profound impact upon Britain’s history.  This writer has been unable to precisely date it, but sometime in the 10th month of 2000, the Mad Cow disease began spreading rapidly among British cattle, as well as into the continent of Europe (and possibly into the US). 

 

This spread of the disease prompted various nations in the European Union to ban the imports of British cattle and meat products.  The US even went so far as to prohibit people from giving blood who had been in Europe in recent times.  The impact of Mad Cow disease was assessed in prior chapters in the vein of health.  Suffice to say, it was a big blow to Britain’s cattle industry.  

 

By early 2001, when it looked like things might be settling down somewhat for Britain, another enormous problem developed when there was an outbreak of Hoof and Mouth disease in Britain, from livestock brought there from Asia or from internal terrorism (as noted elsewhere herein).  It was so serious that further restrictions were imposed upon Britain (if it spreads to the US, there will really be trouble). 

 

The primary impact of this latest problem meant that there was an almost wipeout of the British cattle industry and the export of meat products.  Even the British began giving up animal products in their diets.  It wasn’t only the beef industry that was hit hard; but the Foot and Mouth disease affected sheep, pigs and so forth.  When these problems run their course, will anything be left of Britain’s animal farms? 

 

 

And More Trouble in America 

 

The 10th day of the 9th month (Nov 7, 2000) saw a political crisis erupt when the US presidential election was virtually tied between Gore and Bush.  US turmoil, confusion and uncertainty continued thereafter (as was discussed in former presentations). 

 

The crisis in the United States, over the 2000 elections, could also be laying the groundwork for an overturn of the US ruler, and may have some ante-typical relevance in Haggai 2:22, in that the riders involved will come down--every one by the sword of his brother or fellow. 

 

The “Soncino Books of the Bible” (Haggai, p. 264) interpret that text by saying that “They will fall by one another’s hands, through a panic seizing them or through quarrels breaking out among them.” 

 

The after effects of the US election grew serious on Nov 26, 2000 (near the 29th or 30th day of the 9th month), when the Florida Secretary of the State certified George Bush the winner.  The next day (about the 1st day of the 10th moon), Gore came out and effectively said that he would not accept the Florida results and that he would fight on in the courts and hope to have his own slate of electors for the electoral college. 

 

Soon, much hate and animosity built up between the Gore and Bush forces (as Clinton waited in the background to establish his dictatorship).  In the 10th moon, some open protests and confrontations developed among the partisans over the election outcome.  Though the crisis theoretically was settled in mid December 2000, the November event could be significant ultimately for the US (Ephraim Yisrael). 

 

 

Continuing Troubles 

 

Next, starting in the 10th Scriptural month (December), US Blacks were very upset with the 2000 US elections and began protesting, demonstrating and agitating because they said that their votes were not counted in Florida in the elections (as discussed elsewhere herein). 

 

On Apr 9, 2001, a 19 year-old Black man was shot to death in Cincinnati as he was fleeing from police.  He had a history of several criminal activities and was wanted for 13 outstanding warrants (but was unarmed at the time of the shooting). 

 

Thereupon, the Negro population of Cincinnati came out in force and commenced a riot and looted stores and terrified the city.  The rioting and looting continued for the next three days.  The city imposed a curfew and threatened to call out the national guard. 

 

Of course, Negro rioting, anarchy, looting, and violence are not something new as these things have been happening off and on for the last 40 years.  But this thing in Cincinnati was the worst Negro uprising in quite some time.  Could this event signal the beginning of the promised anarchy by the behemah (Lev 26:22)? 

 

 

More 

 

Also, in what could be of profound importance, the Russians commenced buzzing US warships, moving tactical nuclear weapons to the Far East, and initiating other provocative military moves around this period of time (as reported in the media and noted on NPR on Jan 11, 2001).  Could something be afoot in Moscow? 

 

By Aviv of 2001, several significant conflicts between the US and Russia and China seemed to be materializing.  March 2001 saw both the US and Russia begin expelling diplomats in an apparent resumption of the cold war.  In April 2001, a US spy plane had a mid air contact with a Chinese jet.  The US plane sat down on Hainan Island.  To get the plane and crew back, the US apologized and paid China $34,000. 

 

Thus, some beginning trouble could have come to the House of Yisrael in late 2000 and early 2001.  In any case, the evidence is that sometime by Yechezkel’s 30th-33d years, America’s financial power will crumble and the Jews will eventually be on the Temple Mount for worship.  Perhaps, America’s economic troubles will pave the way for the Jews to gain access to the mount, build an altar or lay the Temple’s cornerstones. 

 

There are also other issues which have or will profoundly affect the economy and money--like the fall out of the 9/11 terrorist attacks and the developing trouble over the Bush war against Iraq in 2003.  These subjects are discussed elsewhere herein. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 513--Countdown to the End

 

 

Some More Dating on the End 

 

Based upon the Scriptural calendar in Yechezkel’s 37th year (when YESHUA likely returns), the seventh trumpet (Rev 11:15) should sound on the first day of the seventh month (the dead, latter, final, two witnesses may be resurrected to heaven just before that time frame). 

 

Quickly, YESHUA returns to Bozrah near Yom Kippur to defeat the Beast army and rescue Philadelphia (as mentioned earlier, at Petra for 1,260 days--Rev 12:6). 

 

From Yom Teruah, there are at least two ending dates which can be easily speculated about.  The 1,260 days of the time that Philadelphia is at Petra should end during Sukkot of Yechezkel’s 37th year.  But this festival, in the greater sense, is eight days long.  Thus, a determination of which day Philadelphia is rescued can be complicated. 

 

Thirty days after the rescue of Philadelphia, YESHUA may enter Jerusalem and take possession of the Temple Mount.  This is evidently at the end of the 1,290 days of Daniel 12:11.  It would be intriguing if it were to occur around Bul 15th (the anniversary of Jeroboam’s act to establish sun worship in Yisrael). 

 

While YESHUA may take possession of the Temple Mount that day, His fight with the Beast power may last some time longer.  This is what happened in the ante-type of the situation with the Maccabees and the Greeks in Jerusalem, when true worship was restored at Hanukkah. 

 

The next big date to note is the 1,335 days of Daniel 12:12, which should happen during Hanukkah in Yechezkel’s 37th year.  Hanukkah is some 75 days from Yom Kippur (by inclusive counting) and almost 1,335 days from when the Daily Sacrifice is stopped by the Beast. 

 

 

To Recap 

 

Thus, Yom Kippur in Yechezkel’s 37th year is an interesting date for one 1,260-day block of time to end (when The MESSIAH puts the guilt for sin upon Satan, as the classic scapegoat).  Consequently, YESHUA should return to Bozrah around the 9th or 10th day of the seventh month (at or near Yom Kippur and 75 days before Hanukkah and the cleaning and rebuilding of the altar for the millennium). 

 

By Sukkot, the very elect at Petra are rescued.  Thirty days later, YESHUA likely enters Jerusalem and takes possession of the Temple Mount (about the 15th day of the 8th month, which should be about 1,290 days since the Third Temple was defiled by the Beast--Dan 11:31; 12:11). 

 

The real, final two witnesses will prophesy exactly 1,260 days (Rev 11:3), which should conclude when the Beast power murders them, possibly in the sixth month of Yechezkel’s 37th year (which means that much of their prophesying will probably accompany the presence of great evil in the last heptad of the time allocated to Adam). 

 

The final two witnesses will lie dead (without burial, on the streets of Jerusalem) for three and one half days (while the world’s people have a celebration and exchange of gifts), to await a resurrection to heaven--perhaps just before the seventh trumpet sounds.    

 

Thus, this writer accepts that the real (final) two witnesses will probably do their public work in about the last part of a seven years’ block of time.  The case might also be made to allow that they will have a ministry in the first half of the last seven years. 

 

Probably, their work in the first half, if it takes place, will be non-public (that is obscure, behind the scenes, in overseeing the organization and functioning of the Third Temple and the development of the election--in fact, they may do their work in the first half of the heptad by mental telepathy). 

 

Philadelphia makes her move to safety during Unleavened Bread in Yechezkel’s 34th year.  She will be at Petra for 1,260 days (Rev 12:6).  Some 1,335 days elapse from just before or about the time that the Beast power stops the Daily Sacrifice in Yechezkel’s 34th year until it is resumed by YESHUA on Mount Moriah at Hanukkah in Yechezkel’s 37th year.   

 

 

The Prophets

 

These just described events seem to lay the groundwork for the surfacing of the two pairs of two witnesses/prophets (as just cited and as discussed elsewhere herein). 

 

Certainly, there likely will be the final two witnesses (perhaps Eliyahu and Yohanan) extensively involved in promoting the building of the Third Temple and the encouragement of House of Yisrael Israelites to leave their lands and go to Jerusalem to join in with the Jews in the building effort. 

 

As was outlined in a prior chapter, there is some evidence suggesting that there will be the presence of two more or another pair of prophets--which could be Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu or two other OT prophets (it may not be them personally, but it could be them influencing or operating spiritually or by mental telepathy through two fleshly men or work--as happened with John the Baptist in the spirit of Eliyahu). 

 

Logically, it would seem that this pair of prophets (correctly the first pair) may publicly surface in the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 30th year. 

 

These two workers will precede the public ministry of the final two witnesses, which could materialize by the fall of Yechezkel’s 30th year (if the work of the final two witnesses, in fact, does cover the last seven years, by inclusive counting), as will be described in a later chapter herein. 

 

If the public ministry of the two final witnesses does come in the last half of the heptad, it means that their visible work worldwide should start just before Passover of Yechezkel’s 34th year.  The public work of the final two witnesses in the last half would suggest that their work in the first half will be non-public, perhaps by mental telepathy. 

 

These final two witnesses and possibly two Jewish leaders seem to be outlined in the situation with the Second Temple--which involved two prophets and two leaders of the people (the high priest and the governor).  These four persons were manifestly present as the four carpenters/builders of Zechariah 1:20-21. 

 

For some time, this writer has allowed that two pairs of workers may be present as these four carpenters in the age end type (as a minimum, the final two witnesses will likely be involved, suggested in Zech 4:8-14). 

 

If the two early prophets are present in this foursome, they could be actual OT people or contemporary men/works operating under the spirits of two OT prophets.  But alternatively, almost any of these four men could also involve contemporary Jewish leaders who work and operate in the spirits of the OT prophets (at least, in the first half of the heptad). 

 

Surely, both the first two prophets and final two witnesses may have some role to play with the start of Yakov’s Trouble and the fall of Yisrael--which may start in Yechezkel’s 30th year, and intensify in his 31st year.  Possibly, both pairs will provide a witness to the Jews and/or House of Yisrael nations. 

 

Too, there is the reality of two Jewish leaders (one secular and a high priest) involved in Jerusalem with the rebuilding of the Temple. 

 

In history, the most logical first two prophets were Yirmeyahu and Yechezkel, at the fall of Jerusalem to the Babylonians (Haggai and Zekharyah were also ante-types at the building of the Second Temple).  Yirmeyahu has much support because the Second Temple Jews generally looked for his return and restoration work and recovery of the First Temple artifacts (II Macc 2:4-8; Matt 16:14). 

 

It is easy to see that an Yechezkel type witness could function in Jerusalem or Washington, DC, or even in modern Babylon (Iraq, New York or Rome) and may undergo the trial outlined in Ezekiel 4--of laying on his side with meager food and water rations for 390 days (the actual prophecy of this event in Ezekiel 4 is worded as if Yechezkel might have seen this event in a vision in his day, in the vein that it was prophetic of an age ending event and person--either Yechezkel himself or some contemporary individual who comes and works under his spirit). 

 

The Prophet Yirmeyahu worked in Jerusalem, and in connection with the throne of David.  Yirmeyahu seems to have had the task of securing some of the Temple artifacts and moving the throne (Yakov’s Pillar Stone) to safety and ultimately to Israelite people in the West (along with King Tzidkiyahu’s daughter).  

 

 

And More 

 

Once the House of Yisrael is destroyed nationally, in the age end, there is some question about the future of this first pair of prophets.  Logically, they could relocate to Jerusalem (if they are not already in Jerusalem), and have a continuing role to play there--at least, until the Beast invades Palestine and perhaps kills them. 

 

Certainly, these first two prophets will oversee the fall of the House of Yisrael and will provide a witness of that fact to the public and particularly to the election (who must start to be identified in that time frame).  These prophets may have some role in recovering the needed Temple artifacts and certainly in moving David’s throne to safety with the fall of the House of Yisrael governments. 

 

They will also be contemporary with some of the builders of the Third Temple (as noted above).  Possibly, the altar goes up or the cornerstones are laid by Yechezkel’s 30th year.  Next, the Third Temple’s foundation (or at least the cornerstones) will possibly be laid and completed by Yechezkel’s 31st year. 

 

Either the first two prophets or final two witnesses could have a task in establishing the actual site of the Temple and recovering some of the anticipated artifacts of the First Temple--like the ark of the Covenant, etc. 

 

If there is a division of Jewish and Muslim worship sites on the Temple Mount, it is plausible that at least one pair of these prophets/witnesses will oversee the work to be sure that the Third Temple is built where it should be (Rev 11:1-2). 

 

As briefly allowed above and earlier, if the first two prophets appear publicly by the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 30th year, their primary work will cover at least 390/430 days (to see the fall of the House of Yisrael). 

 

In the Yechezkel ante-type, the prophet’s first series of prophesies (directed at the fall of the Houses of Yisrael and Yehudah) lasted 430 days (as discussed earlier).  It might be that in the age end type, a similar Yechezkel witness will occur in the House of Yisrael and/or with prophesies addressing the House of Yisrael for 390 days/the House of Yehudah for 40 days.  Perhaps later, the prophets will have a new focus. 

 

Per this writer’s understanding of Yechezkel, any age ending witness of Yechezkel should start by about the 12th day of the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 30th year (as will be described in a later Appendix E herein).  The apparent Yirmeyahu witness may arrive on the scene about the same time or perhaps a little later.  The Yirmeyahu witness may last a little longer than the Yechezkel witness. 

 

 

Maybe Not Needed 

 

In suggesting these first two possible prophets, it should be noted that their prophecies were delivered in the 6th century BCE and Israelites have had their words present in the Scriptures.  Hence, no further witness is actually necessary (as pointed out in a prior chapter herein). 

 

But there is this potentiality that these two witnesses or prophetic works and/or something similar will surface before the trouble intensifies in earnest in Yechezkel’s 31st year or whenever (and very likely in the context of Yirmeyahu and Yechezkel’s work in the 6th century BCE). 

 

These two prophets will probably make some presence of a witness to the Israelite nations or their leaders, although their message will be utterly ignored by national leaders and the media.  How will they do their work?  Any number of ways could be followed.  Besides mental telepathy (which is possible), the Internet might be a part of it, if it is done physically to the people. 

 

Just as the possible first two prophets and the certain two final witnesses will be in Jerusalem for some part of this period of instituting true worship at the Temple, there will also be a number of House of Yisrael Israelites there, as well, plus the very elect present who escape from their lands--just before the balance of their surviving relatives and friends go into their final captivity (by Yechezkel’s 34th year). 

 

This escape has been discussed in some detail in former chapters. 

 

It is this precise presence of some number of House of Yisrael Israelites (mainly from Ephraim, which was often prophetic of the whole House of Yisrael) in the land, along with numbers of Israelite Jews of the House of Yehudah, which combine in Palestine in the age end to create the famous stick of “unity” (or bands in the KJV) mentioned by Zekharyah (Zech 9:9 to 11:14). 

 

Of course, it is this presence of a large number of House of Yisrael Israelites in the land that creates the situation at the Temple when these House of Yisrael people (apparently Christians, as outlined in prior chapters) enter the Temple area to bring their (Christian) abominations and defilements into the Temple (as discussed in Ezekiel 8-14). 

 

In fact, Yechezkel is very precise in defining these House of Yisrael people as being in “Yisrael” (Ezek 14:7).  The evidence is massive that it is these House of Yisrael Christians who appear to link up with Arab Muslims to cause trouble for the Israeli Jews trying to rebuild the Temple--in the context of the prophetic repeat of what happened with the work stoppage in Second Temple days. 

 

 

Yes, House of Yisrael People 

 

Suffice to say, there will be a number of Israelites from the House of Yisrael in Jerusalem or Jordan during much of the work of either the two or four coming witnesses/prophets--along with probably the denominational headquarters of the seven assemblies of Revelation 1-3, as mentioned in a former chapter. 

 

The prophet Yeshayahu appears to have had the seven assemblies or women of Revelation (in the election, mentioned earlier) in mind when he wrote that all seven of them would try to claim YHWH YESHUA and His name in order to obtain safety in the age end (Isa 4:1).  Yeshayahu went on to say that these daughters of Zion (as they are called in the Tanakh) will be cleaned up and made kodesh in Jerusalem (Isa 4:2-3). 

 

Thus, the evidence is fairly persuasive that the denominational headquarters of the age ending seven assemblies (of Revelation 1-3) will relocate to Jerusalem, along with the election escaping there.  Importantly, this escape will also include a rotation of the throne of David back to Jerusalem, where it will be vacated to await YESHUA. 

 

This then sets the stage for the real or latter two witnesses and their public work of preaching the Good News to the world for 3 1/2 years (correctly 1,260 days), to precede their murder and a wait of three and a half days before they are resurrected to heaven (just before Yom Teruah in Yechezkel’s 37th year) to precede the return of YESHUA (near Yom Kippur in Yechezkel’s 37th year, as allowed in previous comments). 

 

These last or second two witnesses/prophets of YHWH seem to accomplish much of their public work in the last part (1,260 days) of something near the last seven years (although they probably will have a non-public, obscure work in the first half of the heptad--this initial work of the final two witnesses could be accomplished by mental telepathy; or if physically, it will be low profiled in the sense of providing oversight to the Third Temple operations). 

 

This actual pair will probably be the real Eliyahu (Mal 3:1; 4:5; Matt 17:3, 11) and the real Apostle Yohanan (Jo 21:21-24; Rev 1:9; 10:8-11; 11:1-2).  Certainly, Eliyahu is fairly sure.  The case with Yohanan might be subject to some further question because of his unique role.  His situation will be discussed in subsequent remarks. 

 

Possibly, Zerubavel and Yeshua or Haggai and Zekharyah were ante-types of these two final witnesses in Zechariah 4:8-14. 

 

Malachi 4:5 notes that Eliyahu will have a role in the age end as likely one of the final two witnesses.  Eliyahu, personally and in the flesh, seems to be surely involved in at least 1,260 days of public prophesying, if not in the full last seven years. 

 

The outline of Malachi, which is crucial, seems to suggest that the final two witnesses are at work in the restoration of true worship in Jerusalem in the period of the first half of the last seven years. 

 

The essence of the book of Malachi is a restoration of true worship in Jerusalem with the Third Temple to precede the installation of the Beast government.  It would seem that Eliyahu must have a role in the establishment of this true worship. 

 

And if so, maybe Eliyahu does appear earlier in the flesh or in spirit by mental telepathy (to work with one of the two Jewish leaders) to commence his task some time in advance of his formal witness from Jerusalem. 

 

Moreover, it is possible that this final pair of witnesses (the classic two witnesses) really become the fulfillment of the two prophets mentioned in Haggai and Zechariah in the rebuilding of the Temple (or alternatively, the case can be made that the first two prophets to arrive on the world scene fulfill the prophetic implications of Haggai and Zekharyah in the rebuilding of the Temple). 

 

 

More on the Age End Leaders 

 

The case can be made for the Apostle Yohanan to also have a role in the early three years (plus) period as well.  Philadelphia, the congregation of brotherly love, logically should have some ties with the Apostle Yohanan.  Of course, these links can happen later in time.  But it would be tempting to suppose that they materialize in the first part of the last heptad (whether it is by inclusive or progressive counting). 

 

The final two witnesses will be interpreted to be (by Christendom and the world at large) the prophetic age end Beast man and False Prophet of Revelation 13.  In other words, Christian preachers and leaders (certainly the TV evangelists and the Pope) will so describe the genuine two witnesses. 

 

Probably, the first pair of prophets (if they appear, in the form of Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu, as noted earlier) will be taken to be the real two witnesses of Revelation 11 (who make their public appearance some time before the final two witnesses appear). 

 

Therefore, when the dragon (Satan) and the wicked Beast man (a European and/or world ruler) arrive on the scene, they will be accepted as the good leaders for the start of the millennium rule of Gee-Zeus (Satan).  However, they have problems with the work of the final two witnesses (who they eventually kill).  No wonder the world will be happy with the murder of the two witnesses (Rev 11:7-8). 

 

The situation with the Second Temple suggests the presence of two Jews who provide much of the oversight for the building of the Second Temple.  In history, they were Zerubavel (the civil leader) and Yeshua (the high priest).  Surely, the Third Temple will have two comparable Jews overseeing the effort. 

 

The Mar-Apr 2001 “Prophetic Flash” had a front page picture of Ariel Sharon and a caption which asked-- “Ariel Sharon--God’s Bulldozer End-Time ‘Zerubbabel’?”  Certainly, the work of Ariel Sharon (and Israeli leader Binyamin Netanyahu as well) will need careful watching in the next couple of years.  Either of them very well could be a key player to produce the Third Temple. 

 

Of the four carpenters and/or four prophets, the books of Ezekiel, Jeremiah, Haggai, Zechariah and Ezra seem to lay out an abundance of information about their work.   Possibly, the last question would be their ultimate futures.  Clearly, the real, final two witnesses will die, as they will thought to be the Beast and False Prophet, per Christianity, and be resurrected to heaven (Rev 11:7-12). 

 

If their testimony might cover the first half of the last seven years (instead of the last half, as this writer now projects), their dead bodies will lie in Jerusalem (perhaps after being embalmed) for three and a half years before being resurrected. 

 

But the better option is that their public work covers almost the last three and one half years.  They would then be murdered at the end of the seven years of their work and would only be dead for three and a half days (instead of years). 

 

 

More on Sharon 

 

While Sharon looked good to the Christian right in 2001 and 2002, things took a bad turn in 2003.  In late 2002, Sharon lost his support in the Knesset and called for new Israeli elections--which took place in January 2003. 

 

Sharon’s Likud party scored big in these elections.  Sharon made another effort to form a new national unity government.  But Labor balked.  Thus, it ended up that Sharon formed his government around evil secularist people in Israel.  In particular, Sharon entered into an alliance with the ultra-secularists in the Shinui political party (which are described in former chapters herein on the Amalekite conspiracy). 

 

With this Sharon alliance with the Israeli forces of evil (the secularists), the left wing Amalekites in Israel began immediate cries for new restrictions on the Ultra Orthodox and the general abolishment of Orthodox power in Israel (as was described in the former chapters just noted).  Obviously, this new direction by Sharon and the evil secularists did not set well with Orthodox people. 

 

The well respected and intelligent Ovadia Yosef, spiritual leader of the Ultra Orthodox Shas party, reacted by calling Sharon “the prime minister of garbage cans” (Mar 7, 2003, “The Week,” p. 9). 

 

Right now, this new alliance between Sharon and the secularist workers of evil does not spell out a good thing for religious Jews in Israel.  Even the Arabs expressed concern over this alliance as it will not work for them to any degree. 

 

The point of mentioning this turn by Sharon proves that he is indeed a politician and perhaps a politician first.  The possibility that he can be used by The MOST HIGH here in the age end has been put into question by this move of Sharon to enter into an alliance with evil people.  Of course, Sharon can always repent and assume a more reasonable profile.  Only time will tell. 

 

 

Zechariah 11:7-14 

 

In any case, Zekharyah makes the case that the final two witnesses are the two anointed ones who supply the oil (The RUACH HA KODESH) to the age ending seven assemblies (Zech 4:1-14). 

 

For years, Dr Ernest Martin of Portland, OR (now deceased) taught that these final two witnesses (Eliyahu and Yohanan?) are the two staves, beauty (grace) and bands (unity between the election of Yisrael and the Jews), who must ultimately die (Zech 11:7-14).  For awhile, this writer allowed that this thinking might be true. 

 

However, upon more analysis, this writer now believes that the two staves represent conditions or situations involving the Jews (and not people, per se).  Grace is easily enough the situation of Jews vis-à-vis YHWH where they are shown mercy and grace in Jerusalem for forty years--evidently, after the Six-Day War of 1967. 

 

Unity is more complicated, although the context of Zekharyah is clear enough that the unity involves the linkage between Ephraim of the House of Yisrael and Yehudah.  Certainly, since 1948 to the present, this connection is manifest.  It will only end when the House of Yisrael is destroyed, perhaps in Yechezkel’s 33d year.  This breakage could occur some seven moths or so before Yehudah, herself, is overcome by the Beast. 

 

Too, there will be a large number of House of Yisrael peoples (perhaps mainly Ephraimites) in Jerusalem just before the Beast conquers the city (perhaps in Yechezkel’s 34th year).  There will surely be present a large number of persons in the election, probably all of Philadelphia, and even a quantity of other House of Yisrael peoples. 

 

While Philadelphia escapes to Petra in the early part of Yechezkel’s 34th year, the rest of the House of Yisrael Israelites may be expelled about the same time to the border of Israel to be conquered and enslaved by the invading Beast power. 

 

This section of Zechariah 11 (on the two staves) covers the mid point of the last seven years--when the Beast, False Prophet and Satan all come to Jerusalem to defile the Temple and impose the great tribulation.  At that time, three shepherds will be cut off (Zech 11:8).  Who are these three? 

 

A commentary by “Soncino Books of the Bible” on this text suggests that these three shepherds are the prophets, civil leader and religious leader.  This seems to be the best option. 

 

Thus, it might be possible that these three shepherds could include any combination of  prophets and/or Jewish leaders.  This writer’s attempt at understanding will be presented in Appendix E. 

 

 

The Great Tribulation, Revisited 

 

Turning next to the Great Tribulation (as discussed earlier), it is probable that the 137,000 election (beyond the likely 7,000 very elect of Philadelphia) will not become over-comers by the end of the work of the two or four prophets/witnesses in the first half of the last heptad, as discussed above.  Thus, the total election will evidently not be delivered from the coming great tribulation, as will be true with the very elect. 

 

In short, the tribulation will be like the refinement of pure silver.  It will clean the 137,000 up and most of them will probably die during the process.  This great tribulation likely starts just about the mid point of the last seven years.  Very quickly, in this time frame, Satan enters the Third Temple as “Jesus Christ” and “God.” 

 

This final, great tribulation also lasts 3 1/2 years to terminate when the seventh trumpet is sounded and YHWH YESHUA returns in two phases to establish His government on Mount Moriah for the millennium. 

 

Just before the Beast man invades Jerusalem (at the start of the great tribulation) and defiles the Temple (in a move paralleling that of Antiochus Epiphanies in c168 BCE), the final two witnesses probably start their public preaching to the world for 1,260 days. 

 

At the mid point of the last heptad, the very elect escape to a place of safety in the East to await the return of YESHUA--initially to Bozrah and later to Jerusalem (Isa 16:1-3).  The final two witnesses are probably protected by The HIGHEST as they perform their public ministry for 1,260 days preceding the return of YESHUA. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 514--Temple Developments I

 

 

The Beginnings of the Return, Revisited 

 

Other chapters herein mention that in the age end there will be a return of a remnant of the House of Yisrael Israelites to Jerusalem to help in the rebuilding of the Temple.  In the Book, there were three writers who provided a historical record on the impetus for the building of the Second Temple. 

 

This effort now in the prophetic record is in the context of the prophets Haggai and Zekharyah and the priest Ezra whose words may have become the ante-type of what to expect for the building of the Third Temple. 

 

Therefore, the prophets Haggai and Zekharyah are both extremely important in describing the impetus for the rebuilding of the Temple and the return of a remnant of Yisrael to Jerusalem, at the fall of the national House of Yisrael (perhaps about four years or so before the return of YESHUA for His millennial rulership of earth). 

 

Not only have these historic two prophets predicted the return and the work the remnant will do (in rebuilding the Temple), but they are important because they both presented a number of crucial dates (including the exact days of applicable months) in the context of the second and fourth years of Darius (Hag 1:1, 15; 2:1, 18; Zech 1:1; 7:1; etc). 

 

The ELOHIM wasn’t just filling up space when He had those dates recorded.  They mean something!  Moreover, it is manifest that those dates in Haggai and Zechariah also relate in some fashion to the dates in Ezekiel (as was discussed in a former chapter). 

 

Since a Tsom HaRevii (fast of the fourth month) event may occur in the 33d year (of some cycle), it might be feasible to date Darius one to about Yechezkel’s 29th year (as was done earlier). 

 

This is very approximate because there is some uncertainty of the dating of the Persian kings (which do not seem to precisely run from Aviv to Aviv or perhaps even from Ethanim to Ethanim, as noted earlier).  So complications can arise in dealing with the Persian dates. 

 

 

2000 Developments 

 

As things developed in 2000, it appeared that everything fell into place in the summer of 2000 for Darius 2 to possibly be the year 2000 (as allowed previously).  Significantly, the Israelis and Palestinians in 2000 had been discussing and negotiating a peace pact--which interestingly would cover a period of seven years.  This factor, in itself, was and is profound (per Isa 28:14-20; Dan 9:27). 

 

It is important to note that the present state of affairs was set up in 1993 with the Oslo (Norway) Peace Accords between the Israelis and Palestinians.  The Oslo accords involved a seven-year pact as a preliminary process to arrive at another seven-year pact in 2000 (which would provide the final peace package).  Thus, a seven-year agreement in 1993 had expired and another seven-year plan was on the table. 

 

In order to help with his legacy, US President Clinton invited the PLO’s Arafat and Israeli Prime Minister Barak to Camp David for peace talks in July 2000.  Several things were on the agenda for discussion.  But the haggling point finally came down to Jerusalem.  Both parties had some major differences which could not be resolved--primarily over who would exercise sovereignty over the Temple Mount. 

 

Though Israel was agreed for the Palestinians to continue to control the Muslim “holy” sites on the Temple Mount, one of the things which the Israelis wanted was the right of religious Jews to go onto the Temple Mount to pray (per Monte Judah, in the Aug 2000 “Yavoh” newsletter, p. 3).  The Arabs were opposed to this option, as well as other questions over Jerusalem. 

 

After weeks of negotiating and disagreeing, it became apparent at the end of July that the two sides could not be reconciled.  Everybody then went home from Camp David without an agreement.  After this peace effort failed, in late July, a strange thing happened a few days later in early August. 

 

Something riled up right wing religious Jews to try to gain access to the Temple Mount to pray (Aug 11, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 3).  Israeli police blocked their efforts.  But the motivation was not to end there because the next week, they tried again and were blocked once more. 

 

 

Monte Judah 

 

In the “Yavoh” periodical, Monte Judah concluded that the Israelis wanted a part of the Temple Mount to pray upon.  Conversely, the Muslim Mufti (religious leader) of Jerusalem strongly disagreed.  It was clear in August that a confrontation was building up between the Arabs and Israelis on this question. 

 

Judah then took a look at Revelation 11:1-2 and Ezekiel 9:1-2 and suggested that indeed there had to be a division on the Temple Mount and that the Jews would ultimately gain access to its Northern area (to surely include the site where the Temple must be built); which could be accessible though St. Stephen’s Gate and the Moslem quarter into the Temple Mount area, via one of the mount’s Northern gates--like perhaps the Hitta Gate (“The Coming Last Days Temple,” p. 355). 

 

The previously quoted Nov-Dec 2001 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 13) had an article by William F. Dankenbring on “Coming Soon--A New Temple of God!”  Dankenbring also took a look at Revelation 11:1-2 in the reference to the court without the Temple which is given over to “the Gentiles.” 

 

He suggested that this court has to be the one to the South of the Temple (in the vein that the Temple should be at the Dome of the Spirits and that the area South of the Temple would be where the Dome of the Rock now stands).  In Dankenbring’s view, Revelation 11:1-2 is describing a division of the Temple Mount between a new Jewish Temple and the Arabs and their edifice.   

 

The contents of the books of Ezra, Haggai and Zechariah all seem to allow this Jewish-Muslim interplay in the form of a possible ante-type of events scheduled in the sixth to eleventh months of Darius’ second year. 

 

 

The Issue 

 

This background then brings up a current question.  Will the situation in 1967-1979 (which legally cut the religious Jews off of the Temple Mount) duplicate the reality with the Second Temple (where work was halted for some 30 or so years).  As discussed in a prior chapter, it might be possible (maybe not precisely, but at least close in timing). 

 

In that sense, it would seem that the situation with the Second Temple and its building and the interruption of the work could be an ante-type of what is now happening here in the age end in terms of the Third Temple.  Actually, this amazing turn of events for the Second Temple could have two fulfillments in our time. 

 

First, there has been the duplication of 30 years or so of disallowing a Jewish religious presence on the mount (for example, from about 1973-1979 to possibly 2003-2009, by progressive counting).  And second, there likely is something more specific for a period of days, starting in Yechezkel’s 30th-31st years. 

 

Thus, after the work on the Temple resumes, will there be another temporary interruption caused by the modern Samaritans/Amalekites (people now found among Christianity and Islam, as discussed in a former chapter)? 

 

Can serious construction work recommence in the fall, winter and/or spring of Yechezkel’s 29th-30th, 30th-31st or 31st-32d years--in fulfillment of what happened in Haggai, Zechariah and Ezra?  At the moment, the answer seems to be yes.  

 

 

Dating the Effort 

 

In background, the returning Jews gained access to the Temple Mount and built an altar there in the fall of Cyrus’ first year.  They laid the Second Temple foundation the next Ziw.  It was at this point that the evil Amalekites-Samaritans stopped the work on the Temple. 

 

Apparently, Haggai and Zekharyah not only laid out the resumption of the work on the building (after it had been stopped for about 30 years), but they seem to have generally dated it--perhaps in an ante-typical fashion. 

 

Haggai’s first date is the first day of the sixth month of Darius’ second year (Hag 1:1).  At that time, the prophet Haggai roused up the leadership of the Jews (Zerubavel and Yeshua) and pushed for a resumption of the building of the Temple (which had started about 30 years earlier). 

 

The next date is the 24th day of the sixth month when YHWH stirred up the spirits of the Jewish leaders to prompt them to resume the work on the Temple in some manner (Hag 1:15).  They then started some portion of the work or at least started work on preparations. 

 

On this first work, the “Soncino Books of the Bible” (Haggai, p. 258) says that the Jews began the preliminary work of collecting materials and clearing the site.  Soncino quoted Rashi, who suggested that they began quarrying stones and cutting wood.  “Encyclopaedia Judaica” (v. 15, p. 956) notes this beginning work and dates this 24th day as the date of the resumption of the building effort. 

 

 

The Shaking Prophecy   

 

The next date in the process was the 21st day of the seventh month--during Sukkot (Hag 2:1).  At that time, YHWH’s prophet encouraged the Jewish leadership to have faith and proceed (though the Temple site was bare, with nothing on it--Hag 2:3).  The EL predicted a soon coming shaking of the heavens, earth and nations (Hag 2:6-7), which logically must tie in some way with the preparations for rebuilding the Temple. 

 

There are two implications in the shaking prophecy.  First, there is the obvious in the vein of a land shaking (an earthquake?).  Next, there is the likelihood of an enormous upheaval among people/nations in the political and governmental environments.  With the situation now in Jerusalem (in the conflict between the Arabs and the Jews and the efforts to strike a peace treaty), both of these possibilities could have merit. 

 

In that sense, is it possible that an earthquake will strike the Temple Mount area at some point in time and clear whatever part is needed for the ultimate rebuilding of the Temple (Dome of the Spirits or Dome of the Rock)?  The upheaval among nations can occur among the Israeli and Arab populations and/or the world population because of events now taking place on the horizon in the context of the peace talks in 2000-2003. 

 

In background, the PLO/PLA, under Yasser Arafat, went on record that it would declare a Palestinian state in 2000.  The original date set was in May and then it slipped to September 15th.  Later, Arafat scheduled it for November 2000.  In early 2002, Arafat stated that the Palestinian state would be declared in 2002 (but it didn’t happen in 2002).  Sill later, it became indefinite. 

 

If and when the PLO does make this declaration, there could be an enormous crisis. 

 

If an earthquake clears some of the Temple Mount or if the Jews should gain access to the Temple Mount however (if one of the walls collapses, to be discussed in later commentary) for prayer, worship, or whatever, and if the Jews should start to rebuild the Temple, there will be an extraordinary upheaval among many nations/peoples and especially those in the Middle East (and particularly when the Daily Sacrifice is resumed). 

 

 

Zekharyah and the 8th Moon 

 

Zekharyah’s word assumed the center stage in the eighth month, starting as early as the first day and continuing for the rest of the month (Zech 1:1).  In the eight month, Zekharyah issued a call to the people for repentance and a change of attitude (presumably toward rebuilding the Temple, as the “Soncino Books of the Bible” suggest). 

 

In the year 2000, the eighth month came while the Jews were observing their versions of the festivals--Rosh Hashanah, Yom Kippur and Sukkot (the 2000 Jewish calendar was addressed in a former chapter). 

 

Zekharyah’s call for repentance certainly sounds like something for Yom Kippur (as just noted, the Jews actually celebrated it on their 10th day of the 7th month in the year 2000, per their calendar--which was apparently incorrect because the correct Scriptural date of their observance seems to have been the 12th day of the 8th month). 

 

 

The 24th Day of the 9th Moon 

 

The 24th day of the ninth month is the next date in Haggai (Hag 2:10).  It seems to date some actual work on the Temple, plus some other events.  In fact, “Encyclopaedia Judaica” (v. 15, p. 956) uses it to date the laying (possibly the relaying or clearing) of the Temple’s foundation and/or cornerstone (Hag 2:18).  Beyond this implication, it appears that Haggai also foretold a number of other events. 

 

The prophet repeated his earlier prediction of a coming shaking of the heavens and earth--in perhaps an earthquake or another earthquake (Hag 2:21).  Also, he went on to outline the overthrow of kingdoms, the destruction of the strength of the kingdoms of the heathen (the Hebrew goyim), the overthrow of chariots and the riders in them, and the bringing down of the horses and riders--by the sword of his brother (Hag 2:22). 

 

Finally, Haggai promises an elevation in the role of Zerubavel and the making of him as a signet (of activity, rule or leadership in the building of the Temple?) because YHWH has chosen him (Hag 2:23). 

 

 

Problems on Interpreting Haggai 2:10-23

 

At an initial reading of the prophecies from Haggai 2:10-23, one might assume that all of these events take place precisely on the 24th day of the 9th month.  But that issue has raised serious questions in the vein of what has happened in the 9th and 10th months of 2000, if the 2000 events were an ante-type of coming events in Yechezkel’s 30th year. 

 

The first difficulty seems to focus upon the question of the laying of the Temple’s foundation.  Haggai 2:18-19 gives it as “consider now” (think back upon) from this day and upward (Hebrew wamaalah, meaning onward in the counting of days), from the 24th day of the 9th, from the day the foundation was laid/relaid or started, various trees (the vine, fig tree, pomegranate and olive) will produce fruit with a blessing. 

 

This text seems to be contrasted with Haggai 2:15-17, which similarly charges the reader to “consider” (think back upon) this day and upward (using wamaalah again), from before a stone was laid upon a stone (when things were not good). 

 

It would be easy to conclude that before the 24th day, things were bad.  On the 24th day, the Temple’s foundation started (in some manner) and blessings came upon a certain election of people in Yisrael and Yehudah.  At a first reading, that’s what these texts seem to say historically.  However, there could be another idea here prophetically (and especially in view of the former prophecies and their contemporary fulfillments). 

 

It might be that the prophet was only predicting certain future events when he made his prophecies on the 24th day of the 9th moon.  Regarding the building of the Temple, perhaps he was saying that on the 24th day and onward or upward in time (which could be the 24th day and thereafter), work at the site was not done (resulting in trouble for the people).  Once work started at the site, blessings occurred.  

 

The “Living Bible” (p. 720) has an interesting slant on Haggai 2:18-19.  While this translation starts off by suggesting that the Temple’s foundation is finished on the 24th day of the 9th month, it does offer a message that the promise of the coming blessings was being made before the harvest (implying that the coming blessings of the harvest were still future on the 24th day of the 9th month--as they were physically). 

 

In this sense, the other prophecies could also be “after” the 24th day of the 9th moon and in the future.  Maybe the fulfillments of these predictions will cover some days, weeks or even months and all of them will not happen exactly on the 24th day. 

 

Of course, there is also a problem in this text in that in Second Temple days the foundation was actually completed in the days of Cyrus (some 30 years earlier).  In terms of the ante-type, the foundation was evidently not laid on the 24th day of the 9th month.  Thus, one must wonder if the intent of Haggai 2:18 is to really say that the foundation was or will be laid that day.  Maybe not! 

 

 

Actual Wording Problems 

 

There is another problem in Haggai’s work which should be noted.  Whereas, in Haggai 1:1, the Hebrew text actually uses “in the sixth month, in the first day of the month,” the wording is considerably different in Haggai 2:10 where the reference is only to the “four and twentieth of the ninth.”  Haggai 2:18 also has some problems, but the Hebrew text does use the word day. 

 

Haggai 2:20 has another variation by not using the word day, but does use the word month (which was absent in the other texts).  Haggai 1:15 uses both day and month while Haggai 2:1 omits both, although Haggai 2:1 does include the word month in the context suggesting the 21st (day) of the month. 

 

Once Haggai seems to use “day” (the Hebrew yom) in the possible sense of a period or age, as at Haggai 2:23.  This same broad period meaning might could also be attached to Haggai 2:15.  As noted earlier, the Hebrew “yom” is much like the English “day.”  It can mean a longer time period of almost any length (beyond 24 hours). 

 

Generally, translators (including Jewish ones) of Haggai believe that the words day and month are implied in the various applicable texts and therefore add them in, appropriately.  But again, the two words are essentially missing in parts of the Hebrew text (for whatever reason). 

 

Zekharyah’s reference to the 24th day of the 11th month (Zech 1:7) seems complete by using both the words day and month.  While the day is not identified in Zechariah 1:1, the word month seems clearly to be present. 

 

 

The 24th Day of the 11th Month 

 

The last important date in this series from Haggai and Zechariah is the 24th day of the 11th month (Zech 1:7).  A whole order of things seem involved in this historical event and prophecy.  First, there is evidence of peace on the earth at that time (Zech 1:11).  Next, there is an assurance that the Temple will be rebuilt and a measuring line will be stretched out over Jerusalem (Zech 1:16; 2:1). 

 

By then, the four horn enemies of Yisrael and the four carpenters are on the scene (Zech 1:19-21).  The four carpenters are discussed at length elsewhere herein.  Importantly, this foursome will possibly consist of the anticipated coming two prophets, two Jewish leaders, and/or two final witnesses (as cited earlier).  Finally, there is a plea for the election of Yisrael to flee their lands and come to Jerusalem (Zech 2:4-13). 

 

 

Impact of the Dates 

 

Based upon comments outlined in the prior chapters discussing Yechezkel’s 30th year and Darius’ second year, it seems almost a certainty that the events described by Haggai, Zekharyah and Ezra will fulfill precisely on schedule in the late summer, fall and winter of Yechezkel’s 30th year.  These remarks are being written in early 2003.  So likely, the prophesied events will take place on schedule. 

 

But certain things happened in much of 2000 which led this writer to believe for a while that the prophecies were being fulfilled then.  Since they were so close in fulfillment in some respects, it might be that the year 2000 saw a limited and partial ante-typical fulfillment of them (as briefly noted above). 

 

This possibility clearly happened in the months of August, September and October for the prophecies of the 6th, 7th and 8th months.  However, the prophecies of the 9th and 11th months passed with no seeming fulfillments.  But some interesting things did happen--which could be relevant. 

 

First, as briefly mentioned in a prior chapter on the Temple, it must be significant to note that Palestine was in an enormous drought and great heat wave during the summer of 2000 (which extended on into 2001, 2002, and early 2003 with but little relief).  Water has been in short supply! 

 

In 2001, this drought continued.  By then, it was the worst one in the area in 100 years (May-Jun 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 37).  The Aug 2002 “Bible Light International JPM News & Prayer Requests” (p. 2) noted Israel’s worsening water shortage, and that Israel may soon have to declare a water emergency.  This drought in Palestine agrees with Haggai 1:11. 

 

Next, as noted above, a group of right wing religious Jews tried to gain access to the Temple Mount to pray early in the sixth Scriptural month (August)--persons in the Zo Artzeinu protest movement (Aug 11, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 3).  Their efforts were blocked by Israeli police.  More efforts by religious Jews came the next week. 

 

Gershon Salomon, cited earlier, is the leader of the Temple Mount Faithful group. 

 

Salomon and his people have held protest meetings near the Temple Mount, starting in the sixth month (in August) of 2000 and continuing into early 2003, to make their position clear that they would not stand by and allow the Israeli government to give away Jewish rights to, or a Jewish religious presence on, the Temple Mount (Aug 25, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 8-9). 

 

A number of other Temple groups have recently come together in a unified alliance called “The United Association of Movements for the Holy Temple” (Aug 25, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 8).  This group has begun collecting signatures of “rabbis” to support the idea of Jews being able to pray on the Temple Mount. 

 

 

The Temple Mount Problem 

 

Many of these groups are pushing for the Israeli government to take control of the Temple Mount and some even have suggested the rebuilding of the Temple (Aug 25, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 9).  Others have taken a more moderate approach and have said to leave the sovereignty of the Temple Mount to The ELOHIM (which may be exercised soon, in a earthquake or some other shaking event). 

 

Former US President Clinton and his people had been driving Barak and Arafat hard for a peace treaty.  As noted above, the biggest obstacle has been the question of sovereignty over the Temple Mount.  One idea floated is that it should be under “divine sovereignty” (Sep 8, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 2).  Jerusalem Mayor Ehud Olmert supported this thinking in 2000. 

 

The US has proposed that the mount be divided into four sectors:  the Al-Aksa Mosque and the Dome of the Rock, the Temple Mount plaza, the mount below ground and the outer wall.  Each sector would fall under either Israeli or Palestinian sovereignty or the joint control of both and/or under the control or supervision of the UN Security Council.  

 

Something like this US scheme or a plan similar to it could be the envisioned Temple Mount situation in Zechariah 1:16 and Revelation 11:1-2.  While the UN or EU might initially control the mount and/or the Old City, it is possible that, in time, the Vatican will take charge (which has been her ambition for ages). 

 

Also, in the 6th moon of 2000, the Chief Rabbinate’s council discussed the building of a synagogue on the Temple Mount (Aug 18, 2000, “Jerusalem Post,” p. 2).  A committee was appointed to consider such an undertaking and the whole question of sovereignty over the Temple Mount.  Question--could they have started gathering material to build a synagogue--but which will be used later to build the Temple? 

 

 

The Intifada 

 

Next, per news reports, Ariel Sharon (Chairman of the right-wing, Israeli, Likud, political party) and some guards and colleagues went onto the mount to demonstrate a presence on the first day of the eight month or September 28, 2000, (which sounds much like Zech 1:1- 6). 

 

A group of Arabs threw rocks at them and the Israeli police.  A riot broke out and Arabs continued to riot and attack Israeli police for the succeeding days. 

 

With the explosion of this trouble (called the Intifada), both the Israeli and Arab authorities immediately imposed a total ban on Jews to not allow them access to the Temple Mount.  Earlier, religious appearing Jews were prohibited access, but non-religious Jews could go on the mount as other tourists were able to do. 

 

But with the Intifada, all non-Muslims were prohibited from the mount (Aug 26, 2002, “Jerusalem Report”). 

 

The Arab rioting grew worse and the Israelis responded with helicopter gunship attacks on the 15th day of the 8th month (Oct 12)--after the Arabs murdered some Israeli soldiers in Ramallah that day. 

 

Slick Clinton called for a regional summit at Sharm el-Sheikh, Egypt on Oct 16-17, 2000 (the 19-20th days of the 8th month), to bring the parties together for peace talks. 

 

The summit produced a so-called formula for a cessation of the fighting and plans to continue the peace negotiation within two weeks.  But both parties ignored the agreement and the conflict continued through the 8th month.  The Arab rioting and Israeli intransigence created a stalemate in the peace negotiations--which continued in the 8th month while the Jews were observing their festivals. 

 

 

It Continued 

 

Then, on the 1st day of the 9th month, Yasser Arafat, himself, publicly called for the Intifada (the uprising) to continue.  And it did continue into 2001, 2002, and early 2003 (In fact, in 2002-2003, several Arab terrorists turned themselves into suicide bombers to focus much world attention on the subject). 

 

Simultaneously, in late 2000 and early 2001, Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Barak began pushing for a national unity government with Ariel Sharon and the right-wing, Likud party. 

 

Furthermore, by the 1st day of the 9th month, the PLO/PLA began to publicly complain about the US being the only mediator for attaining peace in the Middle East (as demanded by the Israelis). 

 

A BBC news report on Oct 31, 2000, said that the Palestinians have now come out and called for peace talks to include the UN, EU and Russia and for a UN peace keeping force to come into the West Bank. 

 

On the 2nd day of the ninth month, Shimon Peres (a colleague of Barak) and Yasser Arafat met and entered into an agreement to end the violence.  But Hamas, Jihad and other Muslim terrorist groups continued the violence and said that they would not be bound by the pact (so the violence continued). 

 

 

Some Possible Overturns of the 24th Day of the 9th Month

 

A few days after the 9th month ended (about the 1st day of the 10th month--Nov 28, 2000), the Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Barak faced a no confidence vote in the Knesset. 

 

Accordingly, Barak called for new Prime Minister elections and formally resigned a few days later (the election came on Feb 6, 2001, and Ariel Sharon won).  Could this be a type of one of the overturns which Haggai promised (or perhaps a later one--like the overturn which occurred in Nov 2002, when new elections were called for in Jan 2002 after the Israeli Labor Party quit a coalition with Sharon and the Likud)? 

 

There were some similar possible overturns underway in 2000 in the United States and Great Britain in the time-frame of the 24th day of the 9th month.  These events have been or will be discussed in other chapters herein--in the context of the 10th day of the 10th month. 

 

The point of this is that the prophesied events of the 9th and 11th months did not have any clear fulfillments in 2000-2002.  Hence, they are truly future after 2002. 

 

In any case, the Palestinian and Israeli negotiators started meeting in Washington on December 20, 2000, and continued on until early January 2001.  But all of these efforts fell through and no agreement or peace treaty was forthcoming. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 515--Temple Developments II

 

 

The Saudi Peace Proposal 

 

In early 2002, the Saudi Crown Prince Abdullah launched a peace initiative to supposedly end the mass of Palestinian suicide bombings and Israeli retaliations that have become common place in 2002-2003. 

 

During the week of March 24, 2002, Abdullah presented his plan to the Arab League summit meeting held in Beirut, Lebanon.  Some 22 Arab leaders were in this session.  But some important ones were missing--like Yasser Arafat from the Palestinian Authority (he was afraid that Israel would not let him return to Palestine, so he refused to leave). 

 

The Saudi plan called for the establishment of a Palestinian state with East Jerusalem as its capitol; for the Israelis to pull out of all Palestinian land occupied in the six-day war of June 1967 and from the territories now occupied by the Israelis in Southern Lebanon; and for a just solution for the Palestinian refugees, which is to be agreed upon in conformity with UN General Assembly Resolution Number 194 (Apr 8, 2002, “Time,” p. 46). 

 

In return, the Arab states would enter into a peace agreement with Israel, would recognize its right to exist, and would commence “normal relations” (Mar 29, 2002, “The Week,” p. 2).  All 22 Arab states finally did agree to the plan and endorsed it.  The Israeli reactions were mixed over the proposal. 

 

UN Resolution 194 gives the Palestinian refugees the right to return to their homes in what is now the state of Israel or to receive just compensation.  Israel rejects the former stipulation, but would not oppose the latter provision if the US and West put up the money to pay off the exiled Palestinians. 

 

In terms of allowing the Palestinians to have their capitol in East Jerusalem, there is a hitch here as the Israelis have refused to give up any part of Jerusalem. 

 

The results of the peace effort was covered in some detail in former chapters on the Amalekite Internationalists. 

 

 

The Advertised 2002 International Conference 

 

Following a meeting with Saudi Crown Prince Abdullah, the week of April 29, 2002, saw the Bush administration announce a new international peace conference on Palestine to take place later in 2002 or as soon as possible thereafter.  Supposedly, it will involve the US, EU, UN, Russia and assuredly the Israelis and Arabs. 

 

In possible anticipation of such a peace conference, Ziad Abu Zayyad, the Arab Minister for Jerusalem Affairs, went public in July 2002 with a plan suggesting that “no man’s sovereignty will be practiced” on the mount; that the Haram (the Dome of the Rock) would come under Palestinian administration; and that the Western Wall would come under Israeli administration (Aug 28, 2002, “Jerusalem Report,” p. 50). 

 

This latest Arab proposal would solve much of the sticking point between the Arabs and Jews over sovereignty of the Temple Mount.  In addition, Zayyad proposed that an international body oversee the mount to ensure that no excavations take place at the site and insure a guarantee of freedom of worship and access by all to the mount. 

 

Surely, the very idea of no sovereignty and an international overseeing body would open the door to some type of an alleged independent third party--like possibly the Vatican.  Since the Vatican has for years had her eyes set on ruling the religious sites in Jerusalem, this plan would certainly receive a favorable response from the pope. 

 

Some left-wing Israeli politicians have discussed such an idea earlier.  But Zayyad’s remarks is a new first for the Arabs.  Some leading Palestinian public figures have endorsed this latest Muslim proposal. 

 

 

The Developing Plan 

 

Though the proposed international conference did not take place in 2002, the US, UN, EU, and Russian officials did jointly offer a plan to provide for a phased-in Palestinian state by 2005. 

 

This plan demands that the Israelis loosen restrictions on the Palestinians, end military “provocations” in Gaza and the West Bank, and move toward dismantling Israeli settlements in the territories in exchange for the Palestinians to end the violence (Oct 24, 2002, “Spokesman-Review,” p. A3). 

 

All along, both the US and the Israeli state expressed opposition to Palestinian President Yasser Arafat.  The US then put pressure on the Palestinians to appoint a new Prime Minister who would be acceptable for negotiations.  This happened in Aviv 2003 when the Palestinian Authority named Abu Mazen (also known as Mahmoud Abbas) as Prime Minister. 

 

By late Aviv (April), Abbas had named a cabinet and was ready to proceed with peace talks.  Bush said that he would then negotiate the future of Palestine.  As an inducement for peace, the US and other major powers will likely agree to give bundles of new money to both the Israelis and Palestinians if they will agree to peace.  The New World Order crowd wants this peace.  So it is coming! 

 

All along, Bush promised that once the US had seized Iraq (which was done in Aviv 2003), the Bush administration would concentrate upon an Israeli and Palestinian peace settlement. 

 

What will happen if the US tries to force a peace settlement on the Israelis?  What will happen if such a settlement forces the Israelis to give up claims to the Temple Mount?  Will religious Jews revolt against such a plan and do something on the Temple Mount? 

 

 

Three Phases 

 

Specifically, this developing plan projects some three phases in the accomplishment of the objectives (Oct-Dec 2002 “Hebrew Roots,” p. 27).  Phase one runs to May 2003 and provides that the Palestinian leadership take a stand on the right of Israel to exist and implement a cease-fire in the on-going Intifada.  Israel is to withdraw from all Palestinian areas to restore the status quo of Sep 28, 2000 (when the Intifada began). 

 

Phase two runs from Jun 2003 to Dec 2003.  It involves the creation of a Palestinian state with provisional borders.  Phase three begins in 2004.  Another international conference is to then take place with a goal of establishing the permanent status of the parties.  Palestinian statehood is supposed to arrive in 2005. 

 

In a speech before a Likud party meeting in Jerusalem on Oct 23, 2002, Israeli Prime Minister Ariel Sharon said that the new international plan was unacceptable (ibid, p. A3).  Thus, it looked like for awhile there were problems with the plan until George W. Bush conquered Iraq (which pleased Sharon) and doled out billions of new dollars to the state of Israel in grants and loans in Aviv 2003. 

 

Thereupon, Sharon modified his opposition somewhat (and especially, in view of the fact that the US and other world powers will plow stacks of new money into Israel).  The Apr 24, 2003, “The Week” (p. 3) had an item which quoted Sharon as saying that Israel is willing to make “painful concessions” by giving up Jewish settlements in the occupied territories. 

 

Sharon went on to acknowledge that a Palestinian state would have to include cities that have significance to Israel--like Shiloh and Beit El.  Sharon added that “As a Jew, this torments me.  But I have decided to make every effort to reach an agreement.”  Of course, it is plausible that the so-called Sharon opposition is all smoke and mirrors to appeal to right wing Jews.  So maybe, Sharon will finally cave in on all points. 

 

 

The Green Light to Proceed 

 

Despite some possible remaining Sharon opposition, it appears that the big powers (the US, UN, EU, and Russia) have agreed to the plan in principle and seem determined to proceed with it in 2003, following the US conquest of Iraq and the appointment of a Palestinian Prime Minister and cabinet to negotiate the plan in place of Yasser Arafat. 

 

Accordingly, the “road map” to peace was delivered by the US on Apr 30, 2003.  The US delivered copies of the plan to Sharon; and accompanied by envoys from the UN, EU and Russia, handed the plan to the new Palestinian Prime Minister Mahmoud Abbas (May 1, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review,” p. A1).  Abbas (also known as Abu Mazen) accepted the plan and called upon Israel to implement the plan at once. 

 

But Sharon backed off and commenced new attacks on the Arabs in the territories.  The Palestinians meanwhile continued with their suicide attacks.  So this peace plan will require some big dole outs of US money to see daylight.  But these pay offs will come as Bush is determined to push his peace plan (just like Bill Clinton before him). 

 

In any case, the Israeli cabinet met on May 25, 2003, and voted to accept the Bush road map, but with some reservations.  In a separate matter, the Israeli cabinet voted that no exiled Palestinians will be allowed back into Israeli territory.  Also, there is some hesitancy in dismantling the Israeli settlements in the Palestinian territory. 

 

But both of these problems can be overcome with the US and West making huge pay offs.  The exiled Palestinians can be paid money and the US and West can rent the area of the settlements from the new Palestinian state (thus allowing the Palestinians to claim the areas of the settlements, while America and the West pay the Palestinians money for the rent of the areas occupied by the Israeli settlers). 

 

 

The June 2003 Summit 

 

With the arrival of June, Bush met with several Arab leaders in Egypt on Jun 3, 2003, who endorsed the plan; and then Bush attended a summit with Sharon and Mazen on Jun 4, 2003, in Jordan, to begin implementing the road map. 

 

In preparing for these meetings, the May 29, 2003, Spokane “Spokesman-Review” (p. A5) had a report on “Bush to dive into Middle East peace process” which quoted National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice who indicated that “Bush has been reluctant to involve himself directly in the Middle East peace process.  He decided to change course, because ‘Arab leaders with whom he would meet (in Egypt) were all telling him that this is a historic opportunity for peace.’” 

 

Per the Jun 2, 2003, “American Free Press” (p. 10), one of the issues addressed in the Bilderberg meeting in Versailles, France in May 2003 was the plutocratic plans for peace in the Israeli-Palestinian conflict.  For some time, it has been quite clear that the plutocrats want a peaceful settlement of this conflict (this includes both the European and North American Amalekite plutocrats, like the Bronfmans and Rothschilds). 

 

The AFP has it that the Bilderbergs went on record with a demand upon Sharon to adopt the Bush road map for peace or face a cut off of the billions of dollars which the US gives Israel annually.  Apparently, the Bilderberg threats upon Sharon had some impact because he was progressively more attuned to the Bush road map.  At least, he started talking about peace and easing restrictions on the Palestinians. 

 

 

Subsequent Follow-Up 

 

After the Bush summit with Sharon and Mazen, both the Israelis and Palestinians did begin implementing the peace plan--although there were a few flare ups (like when the Palestinians attacked a Jewish army post and when the Israelis attacked a Hamas leader). 

 

Mazen met with his primary opposition (like Hamas) and was not able to get them to surrender their arms.  Thereupon, the US commenced a program of funding, training and equipping the Palestinians to build a viable police force and army.  While this effort will cost the US a bundle of money, it should help solidify the position of Mazen and pave the way for him to gain control over the different Palestinian factions. 

 

The road map calls for another summit of the US, Palestinians and Israelis at the end of 2003 to sign a preliminary peace treaty with provisional borders for the new Palestinian state.  If this thing goes forward and the meeting takes place as planned, it could mean that Sharon has or will agree to a sell out of religious Jews on Mount Moriah. 

 

If this happens, religious Jews may eventually take matters into their own hands and seize the mount.  If this ever happens, it will mean the Third Temple. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 516--Temple Developments III

 

 

Gershon Salomon and the Fall 2001 Temple Developments 

 

The previously mentioned Gershon Salomon, leader of the Temple Mount and Land of Israel Faithful Movement, outlined some profound developments on the subject of the new Temple, in a report during Sukkot of 2001 (as reported in the Nov-Dec 2001 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 1-3)--viz: 

 

“On Thursday 4th October 2001, The Temple Mount and Land of Israel Faithful Movement brought two cornerstones for the Third Temple.  Despite the fact that a cornerstone could not be laid on the Temple Mount on Tisha B’ Av and was only brought to the southern gates of the Temple Mount, the Faithful Movement decided this time to bring two cornerstones and to show progress in the battle for the rebuilding of the temple.  We decided to continue to bring the cornerstones until the gates of the Temple Mount are opened, the cornerstones are laid and the great vision starts to be fulfilled. 

 

“Each marble cornerstone weights 6.5 tons and they are of the same kind as those used in the Second Temple.  In accordance with Scripture they have been prepared without the use of iron implements. 

 

“The authorities in Israel initially gave us permission to again bring the cornerstones to the southern gates of the Temple Mount and to anoint them there.  They were not ready to confirm the plans of the Temple Mount Faithful Movement to lay them on the Temple Mount in the same location of the First and Second Temples because of the fear of Arab riots and under the pressure of other parties. 

 

“During the days immediately before this historical event the pressure and the threats of violence became stronger and on the evening before the event the authorities rescinded the permission relating to the cornerstones.  They only allowed us to hold the other parts of the event--to anoint the two cornerstones in Jerusalem where they lay not far from the holy hill waiting to be taken to the Temple Mount, to march to the western (Mugrabi) gate of the Temple Mount, the City of David and the Pool of Siloam for the Biblical ceremony of Nisuch Hamaim, and to display the initial architectural plans for the temple in front of the western gate of the Temple Mount. 

 

“Early on the morning of the event The Temple Mount and Land of Israel Faithful Movement made a petition to the Supreme Court.  In the petition the Faithful Movement claimed that the decision of the Israeli Government was a result of weakness and their giving in to the threats of violence by the Arab enemies of Israel especially the terrorist Yasser Arafat. 

 

“The Faithful claimed that the laying of the cornerstones and the commencement of the building of the temple is the commandment of G-d at this time and that this is the only way to establish a real and godly peace in Israel and all over the world and will establish G-d’s kingdom, His morals and values not only in Israel but all over the world. 

 

“The Supreme Court discussed the petition in the afternoon after the event of the Faithful Movement had ended.  They decided that the Faithful Movement and the Israeli authorities should meet to find a way how and where the cornerstones could be brought and anointed.  However it was too late and we had decided to anoint the cornerstones in the early morning in the place where they stood not far from the Temple Mount and the Pool of Siloam. 

 

“We also immediately decided to bring the cornerstones to the Temple Mount and to anoint them during Hanukkah this year on the 16th December.  The campaign for the rebuilding of the temple cannot be stopped and we shall continue with it until the cornerstones for the Third Temple are laid on the Temple Mount and the temple rebuilt at the same place as the First and Second Temples. 

 

“In the early morning of the event, the two cornerstones were anointed in a very exciting ceremony with prayers and a great hope that during Hanukkah they will be anointed on the Temple Mount.  The media from Israel and all over the world published the pictures of the cornerstones and brought them to the attention of all the world. 

 

“Actually, the process of the rebuilding of the temple started when the cornerstones were brought to Jerusalem and anointed.  The first step has been taken and the second is soon to come.  Since this event pilgrims from Israel and all the world have come to visit the cornerstones and to pray there and to be inspired by the godly spirit which surrounds them. 

 

“After the anointing of the two cornerstones, members of the Faithful Movement from Israel and abroad and many other people marched to the Temple Mount.  It was a holiday pilgrimage and gathering which included prayers and swearing faithfulness to the G-d of Israel and land of Israel and His holy Word.  For the first time in the history of Israel of the last 2,000 years the initial plans for the Third Temple were presented by the architect of the Faithful Movement as well as a large model of the temple. 

 

“A priest dressed in the original Biblical garments which have been recreated in Jerusalem during the last year according to the Biblical design presented the vessels for the Third Temple which have also been prepared according to Biblical design.  He led the prayers accompanied by Levites who played on Biblical musical instruments.  Gershon called on the Israeli Government to have courage and spiritual godly motivation to fulfill Yisrael’s historical task and to immediately purify the Temple Mount and rebuild the temple. 

 

“He said that only this will remove Yisrael’s enemy from the Holy Land and bring a real peace and redemption to the people and land of Israel and then to all the world.  Terror and violence against Israel, the United States and all the world could not happen if the temple existed today and the Kingdom of G-d, His morals and values and a real identity of Israel and the world. 

 

“After this which took place in front of the western gate of the Temple Mount, the large crowd marched to the City of David and, in the same place where King David anointed the Ark of the covenant for the First Temple, we prayed the prayers of King David and his pleadings to G-d to build His house on Mt. Moriah while facing the Holy of Holies. 

 

“From here we marched to the Pool of Siloam where we performed the Biblical ceremony of Nisuch Hamaim exactly as was done in Biblical times when pilgrims who had come for the Feast of Tabernacles, the kings and priests marched to the Pool of Siloam to draw water which was then poured out on the altar with prayers for a blessed new year with rains and G-d’s blessings.  This was one of the most exciting events of this year’s feast. 

 

“Everyone in Israel and all over the world is called on to stand together with the Faithful Movement and to help it in all ways at this godly time which will change the life of all of the world and will redeem Israel and all mankind, especially those who are working together with G-d toward His end-time goals, from all the troubles of this time.  Let all of us be a part of the most exciting events that have ever occurred in the life of mankind.  Prepare yourselves for the next laying of the cornerstones during Hanukkah and the G-d of Israel will be with us.” 

 

For a follow-up on events at Hanukkah in 2001, it appears that the Temple Mount and Land of Israel Faithful people tried again to take the cornerstones on the mount (following a march from Modi’im, the village of the Maccabees-- “The Voice of the Temple Mount Faithful,” p. 12), but Israeli authorities once more blocked their efforts. 

 

 

Later Events 

 

As was its practice earlier, the Temple Mount and Land of Israel Faithful Movement continued its efforts during the Jewish festivals in 2001, 2002 and early 2003 to gain access to the mount (although this prohibition was to start to give way in 2003, as noted earlier and to be further described in later comments).  As happened in previous attempts, the Israeli police routinely turned the Faithful people away at each occasion. 

 

On the fast of the 10th day of Teveth in 2001, the Faithful group marched around the Temple Mount which is closed to Israelis and non-Muslims (ibid, p. 13). 

 

They called upon the Israeli government “to open the gates of the Temple Mount for worship and prayer, to purify the holy hill of G-d from the pagan enemies and foreigners, and to rebuild the temple to be a house of prayer, worship and love for the G-d of Israel...” (ibid, p. 13). 

 

During this march, the Arabs on the Temple Mount threw rocks at the marching Israelis (as they have done previously).  Earlier, the same day, many “rabbis” attended a convention to address the situation on the Temple Mount.  They called for the government to immediately open the Temple Mount for Jewish worship (ibid, p. 14). 

 

A later march by the Faithful people on Feb 13, 2002, brought out a thousand marchers--including Jerusalem Mayor Ehud Olmert (mentioned previously); other mayors from Judea, Samaria and Gaza; and a number of the members of the Israeli Knesset.  These marchers marched around the Temple Mount gates and prayed  prayers (ibid, p. 15). 

 

Mayor Olmert (who may know something about what all is going on) “encouraged the marchers to continue their campaign without fear.”  He also stated that the Temple Mount is the heart and soul of Israel and the most holy place for the Jewish people; the gates of the Temple Mount will soon be opened to Jews and other non-Moslems, just as Prime Minister Ariel Sharon had promised (ibid, p. 15). 

 

 

More from 2002 

 

At Passover, in 2002, the Faithful people became more bold.  They marched to the office of Prime Minister Sharon and called for him to open the Temple Mount gates in order for them to fulfill the commandments of The ELOHIM.  The marchers then took an animal for sacrifice and stones to build an altar and went to the Temple Mount, ready to enter upon it, build an altar and offer a Passover sacrifice (ibid, p. 17). 

 

The congregation prayed the Hallel prayers (Ps 113-118) and sang Psalms 136.  They brought with them a model of the coming Temple and placed it at the Western gate.  But again, the marchers were turned aside by Israeli police. 

 

Thereupon, at the Western Gate, the marchers danced around the model with great excitement.  They then marched around the Temple Mount to stop and pray at each gate and blow the previously mentioned two silver trumpets (ibid, p. 17-18). 

 

They called upon the Israeli government to immediately open the gates of the Temple Mount, with no fear of the enemies of Israel and the great powers of the world.  The marchers went on to ask that the East Gate be opened to prepare the way for MASHIACH BEN DAVID.  The ceremonies ended with the marchers singing the national anthem, Ha Tikva (ibid, p. 18). 

 

More marchers and ceremonies around the Temple Mount took place at the rest of the Jewish festivals in 2002.  At Shavuot, the marchers brought the first fruits offerings and attempted to take them to the mount before being rejected by the Israeli police (ibid, p. 22). 

 

On Tisha b’Av (Jul 18, 2002), the Faithful people showed up with the two cornerstones and made a call for the rebuilding of the Temple.  In front of the Eastern Gate, Gershon Salomon called on the Israeli nation to stop the prayers at the Western Wailing Wall  and to go onto the mountain to worship and pray (ibid, p. 23). 

 

Salomon said that “G-d expects Israel to rebuild His house and to open the godly endtime era in the life of Israel and all mankind.” 

 

Gershon added that as long “as the enemy of G-d exists on the Temple Mount, continuing their foreign pagan worship and preventing the rebuilding of the Temple, the hill of G-d will continue to be like a volcano sending tremors throughout the land of Israel, the Middle East, and all the earth” (ibid, p. 23). 

 

This meeting ended with the singing of Ha Tikva and the words of Salomon that the Faithful “will never give up and that the campaign for the rebuilding of the Temple will continue even more intensively... The campaign and process for the rebuilding of the Temple will continue until the soon rebuilding of the Temple.  This is the will of G-d of Israel and nobody can prevent it” (ibid, p. 24). 

 

 

And 2003 

 

Similar marches and ceremonies have or will take place during the festivals in 2003.  At Passover, there were efforts once more to try to get on the mount, build an altar and make the Passover sacrifice of a lamb.  If the cornerstones are not laid by Tisha b’Av, there will be an attempt to lay them then.  The laying of the cornerstones is still a future event with the arrival of the summer of 2003. 

 

But while the Faithful people did not or could not lay the cornerstones by the summer of 2003, there was a most important development on the Temple Mount when Israeli authorities gradually, quietly and partially opened it up to both Christian and Jewish visitors, including religious Jews (as outlined in a former chapter herein). 

 

As noted earlier, the Jul 11, 2003, “Jerusalem Post” (p. 4-5) reported that for the past few weeks, Christian and Jewish groups were being allowed on the Temple Mount while accompanied by Israeli police (this policy was temporarily suspended in July 2003, but later resumed).  One group of religious Jews visiting the mount included Efrat Chief Rav Shlomo Riskin and at least nine other religious Jews. 

 

The “Jerusalem Post” quoted Riskin as saying-- “There is an American expression:  ‘If you don’t use it, you lose it.’”  He added that “Our only hope for the future is a willingness by both sides to share.”  His comment was not further elaborated upon.  But it is clear that Riskin was communicating his wishes for Jews to share the Temple Mount with the Muslims. 

 

 

The South Wall Bulge 

 

The fall of 2001 saw the surfacing of another awesome event which could have far reaching implications.  The Jan-Feb 2002 “Archeology Review”  (p. 6) had a full report on this development.  The story said that a significant bulge has appeared in the Southern wall of the Temple Mount near where the Moslems have been excavating underground (as discussed elsewhere herein). 

 

The bulge is 107 feet long and 32 feet high.  It covers more than 2,000 square feet of area.  It runs from 30 feet below the top of the Southern wall and 45 feet from the Eastern end of the wall.  The worst protrusion is about 100 feet from the Eastern end of the wall. 

 

The danger is that part of the Southern wall may collapse.  The nearby Al-Aqsa mosque and underground mosques could also be damaged or destroyed.  The lower part of the wall still contains stones set in Herod’s day (which did not use mortar).  Several hundred years later, the Muslims reconstructed the wall but with smaller stones and using mortar. 

 

The bulge now appears in this reconstructed portion (which did not have the quality of the Herodian construction).  There are several theories on what might be causing the bulge.  It could be due to soil erosion or even due to the excavation efforts that have been underway by the Muslims in their underground work for some months. 

 

After discovering the bulge, Israeli officials hired some engineers to survey the situation.  Their report is disturbing.  Accordingly, the Israelis contacted the Muslim Waqf in charge at the Temple Mount and offered to provide assistance to help shore up the wall, but the Waqf refused the offer (Nov-Dec 2001 “Word from Jerusalem,” p. 14). 

 

In time, the Waqf (with the concurrence of the Israelis) brought in some Jordanian engineers to survey the bulge at the Southern wall.  The Jordanians finished their work on Oct 11, 2002, and said that “the situation was not bad” (Nov 4, 2002, “Jerusalem Report,” p. 5). 

 

Later, this delegation of Jordanians or another one suggested that the condition of the South wall was bad; and that, indeed, the wall could collapse (Tevet 5763/Dec 2002 “Jerusalem Prayer Mandate,” p. 2).  For sure, the Israel Antiquities Authority (IAA) maintained that the Southern wall was in danger of collapsing (ibid, p. 5). 

 

One year ago, in 2001, the bulge was called a fourth month bulge.  Now, it is called an eighth month bulge (Tevet 5763/Dec 2002 “Jerusalem Prayer Mandate,” p. 2). 

 

Anyway, a Jordanian government group of engineers came back on Dec 30, 2002, to do some repair work on the Southern wall (Jan 3, 2003, “Forward,” p. 4). 

 

The head of the delegation, Raef Najim, said that only the Jordanian Waqf could reach decisions about the Temple Mount and that the Palestinian Waqf has no authority over the area.  The implications of this charge could have far reaching consequences since the Palestinian Authority claims this authority and has negotiated with Israel over the status of the Temple Mount. 

 

 

A New Bulge? 

 

Apparently, in the summer and early fall of 2002, a new bulge was detected.  This time, it was on the Western wall, just to the South of the Kotel prayer plaza (ibid, p. 5).  The IAA archeologists suggested that the new concern was a false alarm and then added that there had been some dampness at that point on the Western wall in 1996, due to a leaky irrigation pipe (ibid, p. 5). 

 

Gabriel Barkay, a leading archeologist with the independent Committee for the Prevention of Destruction of Antiquities on the Temple Mount, added that the leakage (evidently new leakage this past summer) was the result of the work undertaken by the Waqf under the mount in the past several months (ibid, p. 5), as elsewhere described herein. 

 

In terms of the new reports of trouble on the Western wall, Adnan al-Husseini, director of the Islamic Waqf, said that additional wetness discovered months ago has been dealt with (ibid, p. 5).  Anyway, the Waqf is busy with stone saws up under the mount in the fall of 2002 for some ostensible reason (ibid, p. 5). 

 

Another news report in the Nov 8, 2002, “The Week” (p. 7), also assessed the problem and said that a new 35-foot bulge has appeared in one of the supporting walls (the report didn’t say which wall but it must be the Western wall).  The budge can buckle and cause the wall to collapse.  Israeli archeologist Gabriel Barkay told the “LA Times” that there is no question but that the wall will collapse.  The issue is when? 

 

These bulges in the Temple Mount walls bring to mind a couple of Scriptures quoted recently in the Volume 9, Number 6 “Bible Light on the News.” 

 

Per this source, Ezekiel 13:10-16 speaks of a partition which is smeared with plaster (weak plaster instead of strong building materials) which will collapse and fall.  The ELOHIM will break down the wall smeared with plaster and bring it to the ground.  Thus, will YHWH pour His wrath out upon the wall and those who smear it with plaster? 

 

Since the bulges around the Temple Mount wall are appearing in areas that were reconstructed by the Moslems, is it possible that Yechezkel is speaking of this situation?  Alternatively, the Muslims may even try to smear plaster around the wall presently in an attempt to repair the damage.  In either case, the wall may come down. 

 

This whole condition brings to mind Habakkuk 2:11 which makes mention of the stone crying out of the wall.  Is it not entirely logical that the bulges around the Temple Mount wall are appearing as a witness first, and later an instrument to create an environment for the building of a new Jewish Temple (when the wall collapses and brings down the Muslim artifacts)? 

 

 

More on Water 

 

As outlined above on the Western wall bulge, the remarks only suggest some dampness from leaky irrigation pipes.  Actually, the problem seems to be far more involved than just a little dampness. 

 

An Aug 2002 letter from “Bible Light International” quoted a recent fax from Marianne Duvernoy in Jerusalem.  Mrs Duvernoy said:  “Since the fast of the 17th of Tamuz there is a stain of water on the wall (Kotel).  The religious Jews said that it is a sign that the Messiah is coming very soon.  Others said that it is rubbish-- I said it’s astonishing.” 

 

A later fax from Mrs Duvernoy added:  “I went to the Wall the day before Tisha B’Av and I saw the stone.  There is only one stone which is wet and it is true that the water runs from the middle of the stone and not from the cracks.”  The Bible Light letter noted that this is not a water pipe leak, etc.  No one knows from where it comes or how it can possibly be right through this stone and not the cracks. 

 

Besides this water coming forth from the Western Wall, there is still another event on water worth noting.  On May 15, 1999, news reports from Jerusalem indicated that unexpectedly and unexplainably, water had begun flowing from beneath the Temple Mount (Jun-Jul 1999 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 25-28). 

 

Here, the question can be asked--could this water flow link in some way to Ezekiel 47:12?  In any case, the Arabs were concerned and installed pumps in an effort to divert the water or indeed stop it if possible.  Religious Israelis saw it as a sign of redemption.  The Muslims saw it as a bad omen. 

 

 

Further Comments from Gershon Salomon

 

The Nov 27, 2001, website of the Temple Mount & Eretz Yisrael Faithful Movement-Jerusalem had a report from Gershon Salomon which updated his efforts.  He wrote about his efforts to lay the two cornerstones during Sukkot (as discussed above).  Salomon added: 

 

“On the day the event (of trying to lay the cornerstones) a large bulge was noticed on the southern wall of the Temple Mount.  The media reported that there was a danger that the Al Aqsa mosque, which is on the southern wall of the Temple Mount, could collapse as a result of the bulge. 

 

“The bulge was not caused by the hands of any man.  Everyone understands that it was caused by G-d Himself.  He did it on the same wall in front of and not far from where the cornerstone was brought even though it was not off-loaded from the truck. 

 

“People in Israel and all over the world understand and feel that this is a clear message from G-d that He expects Israel to immediately purify the Temple Mount, lay the cornerstone and start with the rebuilding of His house.  It is so exciting to see in the marvelous ways G-d is acting in these end-times and how His presence appears in the activities of The Temple Mount and Land of Israel Faithful Movement in such a unique and godly way. 

 

“In any event, the shock and ‘earthquake’ that this cornerstone and the godly idea which lies behind it caused all over the world showed very clearly that none of the world powers can prevent this event and G-d’s prophetic end-time plans.  It was a godly test for all mankind.  So many failed and missed such a godly, historical opportunity to change their negative lives and make this wonderful vision a reality in our lifetime. 

 

“The voice of G-d is being very clearly heard in this critical and exciting times.  We are living very close to the climax of these times.  The historical battle of The Temple Mount and Land of Israel Faithful Movement to rebuild the Third Temple cannot be stopped.  The G-d of Israel is leading his holy Movement and her godly, historical campaign. 

 

“This battle and campaign will continue with the presence and help of G-d even more intensively until the army of G-d is victorious, the end-time Temple is built and He dwells there among and in the midst of His people, Israel, and all the world.  This great moment and the greatest in the life of Israel and all mankind, is soon to come.” 

 

 

“Forward” 

 

The Nov 1, 2002, “Forward” (p. 11) had a related story by Yisrael Medad on “Battle of the Bulge on the Temple Mount” which put the whole problem in perspective.  Yisrael noted both the bulges in the Southern and Western walls and said they had begun to “bubble outwards.” 

 

The point of Medad’s words were that there is both a physical aspect of the bulge(s) which could bring down part of the Temple Mount, and an intangible aspect which sought to avoid complications by ignoring the site’s crucial link between the Jewish past and future.  The intangible one will not go away.  Seemingly, it will force Israel to confront the reality of what the Jewishness of Israel is and should be. 

 

It’s hard to say what all is going on the Temple Mount.  But the foolishness and incompetence of the Arabs (plus perhaps the supreme oversight of The ELOHIM) may collapse some part of both or either the Southern and Western walls and remove the Dome of the Rock.   If this happens, it will pave the way for the coming Third Temple. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 517--Temple Developments IV

 

 

“The Rabbi’s View” 

 

The Jun-Jul 2001 “Tzemach Letter” (p. 2) had a news report that the Rabbinic Council of Judea, Samaria and Gaza have called for mass visits by Jews to the Temple Mount.  Specifically, they have requested that all “rabbis” bring their communities to visit the Temple Mount-- “in accordance with halakha.” 

 

This is the first time that an organized group of “rabbis” have formally ruled that it is permissible for Jews to ascend the Temple Mount.  Surely, some groups have started going up or trying to ascend the mount in the summer of 2001 and thereafter.  This writer is uncertain as to what has happened on this motion (beyond the opening of the Temple Mount in 2003, as mentioned herein in prior chapters). 

 

Next, William F. Dankenbring’s article on “Coming Soon--A New TEMPLE of God!” (cited earlier) in the Nov-Dec 2001 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 12) quotes a highly respected “rabbi” (who was unnamed in the article) as stating at a recent conference in Jerusalem that many of Yisrael’s problems today are due to the fact that they neglected to build the Temple when they had the opportunity, following the Six-Day War in June 1967 (this point was mentioned in prior chapters). 

 

This “rabbi” also asserted that the Jews have been preparing the altar, and already have vehicles pre-loaded with rocks and mortar necessary to set up the altar, after the cleansing ceremonies.  In fact, as discussed earlier, the Jews have reportedly already produced at least one red heifer for the cleansing ritual (as required in Numbers 19). 

 

The cap came off when the “rabbi” said that “We are ready now” to build the Temple.  When someone asked him how long it would take to set up an altar and begin the evening and morning sacrifices, he replied:  “Give us fifteen minutes.” 

 

 

A Growing Israeli Interest   

 

The Feb 12, 2001, “Jerusalem Post” (p. 8) had an interview with Yizhar Be’er on the question of the Temple Mount--which noted that there have been eight or nine Jewish attempts to “strike at the Dome of the Rock” --in the vein of attacking it and destroying it, so a new Jewish Temple can be built. 

 

Be’er is the executive director of “The Center for the Protection of Democracy” (which seems to be a Jewish group opposed to a Third Temple on Moriah--that must be Amalekite based).  He reported that in 1990, there were only 60 Jewish participants at the first conference of Temple Mount organizations.  In August 2000, some 50,000 Jews attended. 

 

In January 2001, some 250,000 Jews assembled and swore their allegiance to the Temple Mount and its role in Judaism.  Temple Mount supporters (or activists) now include such prominent Israelis as Jerusalem Mayor Ehud Olmert (who marched with the Faithful people in 2001, as noted earlier) and Israeli Supreme Court Justice Menachem Elon. 

 

And in what can be called a bombshell of a report, a Feb 11, 1996, poll of Israelis showed that 58.5% of them were ready for a new Third Temple to be built on Moriah.  Most of the younger Israelis are much in favor of it (Dec-Jan 1999 “Restitution Herald,” p. 13). 

 

The Oct 2002 “Israel Today” (p. 29) had a news item on a more recent Dahaf poll of both secular and religious Jews on the rebuilding of the Temple.  Some 53% now support the building of the Third Temple on the Temple Mount.  With this much popular and consistent support, the politicians will eventually cave in. 

 

 

Unity in the Efforts 

 

Previous comments discussed the present efforts to unify the different Jewish Temple Mount groups into one effective overall organization (there are now ten active groups in this overall entity). 

 

These ten different groups, in their unified whole, have divided the work and duties in the task of getting everything ready for the Third Temple.  Some are planning the building of the actual Temple, another segment is studying and planning the sacrifices, another is working on the priestly garments, another element is working on a red heifer and so forth (per Be’er). 

 

While all of these 50,000 Temple Mount Jews in August 2000 may not have been active religious Jews, ready to demolish the Dome of the Rock, many were.  Also, as Be’er suggests, it would be a mistake to ignore the tens of thousands of supporters in the large assembly in January 2001 as marginal. 

 

In the early days, this planning and preparing work for the Third Temple was considered (by secular Israelis, per Be’er) to be a small group of lunatics.  Now, they are seen as a legitimate part of modern Judaism. 

 

Be’er says that this is “very dangerous.”  He anticipates the trouble expanding in the future and has called for the Israeli government to ask for an international peace keeping force to protect the mount and the present status quo (to include the Muslim religious sites). 

 

He adds that one of the goals of this combined group is to thwart any agreement with Palestinians (manifestly, any agreement which will give up Jewish sovereignty over or rights to the Temple Mount).  He charges that the closer Israel comes to an agreement, the higher the risk of a Jewish attack upon the Islamic shrines (that would be a death blow to the peace process). 

 

Maybe Be’er has correctly nailed what will soon happen!  Maybe, when it looks like the Israelis and Palestinians have agreed upon a peace formula, religious Jews will intervene and take things into their own hands.  Perhaps they will charge onto the mount and destroy some or all of the Muslim sites and build a new Temple. 

 

 

More from the “Jerusalem Report” 

 

The May 7, 2001, “Jerusalem Report” (p. 6) had a current analysis by Eric Schechter on the Temple Mount situation in “Government is in bind at Temple Mount warns ex-police chief.”  The essence of this story was the present insight of Arieh Amit, the former Jerusalem police commander.  Amit sees a “Catch-22” situation where there is a risk of “Jewish extremists” carrying out an attack at the mount. 

 

Amit says that “Jewish radicals” may strike because of being provoked by government inaction over the Palestinian Intifada.  He thinks that the pressure on right wing Jews would be released if Jews were allowed to pray on the mount.  However, such an event would trigger an Arab reaction. 

 

While Amit allows that there could be an Israeli backlash at any of the religious sites (like Avraham’s tomb in Hebron), he remains convinced that the Temple Mount is the most serious of the potential trouble spots.  Obviously, conditions are now in place to promote an outbreak of trouble between the Jews and the Muslims on the mount. 

 

It would appear that Arieh Amit probably shares some of the same feelings as the above quoted Yizhar Be’er.  Both of these men are signaling the possibility of an aggressive action by religious Jews to go on the mount, pray, build an altar and start rebuilding the Temple at some point in time. 

 

 

More on the Future   

 

At some point in time, Europe (EU) will totally unify and install a strong European ruler (likely a temporary, interim ruler before possibly the Beast man takes over, as discussed in a prior chapter). 

 

Near this time or sometime thereafter, real trouble will erupt in Palestine--perhaps as early as Yechezkel’s 29th-31st years--over an earthquake or something else which motivates religious Jews to go upon the Temple Mount in force (as discussed above). 

 

Religious Jews on the Temple Mount could get carried away and build an altar and/or lay the Temple cornerstones.  A world crisis might then erupt.  Surely, world leaders will immediately cry for a peace conference to discuss the status of the Temple Mount. 

 

During this coming peace conference (which may drag out off and on over several weeks/months), the Jews should enter into their famous covenant or pact of about seven years with a worldly leader and likely the Muslims in order to allow the resumption of the Daily Sacrifice and the rebuilding of the Temple. 

 

Although mentioned many years earlier in the vein of a covenant with death (Isa 28:15-18), it seems to be the prophet Daniel who really outlined the basis of this coming agreement (Dan 9:27; 11:22).  Daniel 9:27 appears to describe it as a seven-year pact, which the Beast breaks before the last three and one half years to the end. 

 

Zekharyah’s message on the 24th day of the 11th month of Darius’ second year seems to describe a condition of peace in the Middle East at about this time (Zech 1:11).  This time of peace surely would follow the covenant between the Jews and a worldly power, as envisioned by Daniel.  Perhaps this agreement provides for some type of a division of Old Jerusalem (Zech 1:16) and the Temple Mount (Rev 11:1-2). 

 

 

And More 

 

The gist of the books of Ezra, Haggai and Zechariah seems to allow that the Second and possibly Third Temple construction efforts were started, but then stopped by workers of evil at the site.  In the ante-type, it stayed stopped for some 30 years or so. 

 

Maybe, in the type, the interruption will only last so many days--perhaps 30 or indeed even 70 days, as allowed in Zechariah 1:12, in the context of a day for a year.  However, it is conceivable that the typical fulfillment may see more than one stoppage.  Perhaps between the 9th and 11th months, there is another interruption of the work.  Thus, there may be one or more interruptions as Yechezkel’s 30th-31st years unfold. 

 

If Yakov’s Trouble of seven years gets serious in Yechezkel’s 31st year, it might be that a time of peace occurs in Yechezkel’s 31st year or in his 32d year (following the end of the first embargo on the US).  If so, it seems highly unlikely that this final covenant or agreement will last for seven full years.  Possibly, the essence of Daniel 9:27 is seven years by inclusive counting (which can be six years or so in total). 

 

 

Breaking the Compact 

 

So, when the Beast power breaks the covenant, it may not be at the exact end of the first three and one half years (though seven years might be involved in some way).  The situation with Antiochus Epiphanies was a classic fulfillment of the ante-type of the presence of the abomination of desolation (which only covered something less than three years). 

 

“Soncino Books of the Bible” (p. 79, Daniel) notes that the breaking of the covenant occurs “before half the period had expired.”  The point is that the agreement may cover seven years, but the break may not occur at the precise mid-point of that last seven-year bloc.  Possibly, the break could occur anytime in the second or third year and qualify, per Daniel’s prediction. 

 

So, if this covenant happens in about Yechezkel’s 30th or 31st year, it might be broken in his 34th year (which could be three years by progressive counting).  Actually, this writer still looks for a preliminary agreement in Yechezkel’s 30th or 31st year, and maybe a final agreement sometime later by Yechezkel’s 31st-32d years. 

 

Either way, in Yechezkel’s 34th year, the point may be reached for the start of the countdown of 1,290 days for the abomination of desolation to profane the Temple and/or Temple site (Dan 11:31; 12:11). 

 

Anyway, perhaps in Yechezkel’s 30th year, two or possibly all four carpenters may be on the Temple Mount to lay out the dimensions of the Temple and the restoration of true worship.  At some point in time, construction is stopped for a spell (maybe 30-70 days and maybe on more than one occasion). 

 

 

The Great Shaking 

 

Putting this together, certain Jewish leaders are evidently going to be influenced by YHWH in the 6th month of perhaps Yechezkel’s 30th year to build the Temple.  Sometime after the 21st day of the 7th month, an earthquake will possibly strike the Temple Mount and clear some of the site for the building effort--perhaps at or near the time when a great political upheaval takes place among the nations and peoples. 

 

Certainly, Haggai promises a great shaking of the earth (perhaps an earthquake to clear some part of the Temple Mount, as needed to build the Temple) and also a great shaking of the nations (Hag 2:6-7).  These shaking events come sometime after Ethanim 21 (per Haggai 2:6 and the words “in a little while” in the KJV). 

 

Likely, the Jews will at last start thinking seriously about the Temple (in the 8th month). Much of Haggai’s shaking of the nations could occur simultaneously in the 8th month (Hag 2:7). 

 

Perhaps on or after the 24th day of the 9th month (possibly following an earthquake of something to destroy the present Muslim site or sites), the Jews resume construction at the Temple site by clearing it and possibly do some work on the foundation, as necessary, in order to proceed.  This will really cause an upheaval in the nations. 

 

By the 25th day of the 11th month, the measuring line over Jerusalem may divide it between Arab and Jewish factions or may prescribe the limits of the city proper in the vein of internationalizing the city.  The internationalization of Jerusalem is the stated goal of the Catholic Church and a United Europe (as discussed elsewhere herein).  If this should take place, it will be necessary to define the limits and borders of the city. 

 

 

Trends in Motion 

 

On November 29, 1947, the UN adopted Resolution 181 (II) which provided that Jerusalem was to be established as a “corpus separatum,” meaning a “body of separate covenant” (Mar-Apr 2002 “Tzemach Letter,” p. 4).  In 1950, the UN adopted the “Statute for the City of Jerusalem” which set forth the regulations for the administration of Jerusalem by the UN (ibid, p. 4). 

 

These resolutions calling for a separate political status for Jerusalem under UN control have never been revoked.  They are still in effect for all purposes.  Thus, there is already a legal UN groundwork to internationalize Jerusalem and place it under the control and administration of the UN.  Surely, this prospect could easily become reality with the geopolitical situation existing today. 

 

Finally, the George W. Bush administration in 2002 did set forth guidelines for the deployment of an international peacekeeping force in Palestine (ibid, p. 2).  The plan is to use forces from several countries (which means that it will be an international force surely directed and controlled by the UN).  While Israel will not readily agree to this idea, it could be forced upon the Israelis. 

 

As a minimum, any international peace-keepers in old Judea will center their operations on the Old City of Jerusalem and the Temple Mount.  This area is the focus of sensitive tensions between the Arabs and the Jews in Palestine.  With a UN force in old Jerusalem and the wishes of much of the world for the city to be internationalized, that prospect can easily become a reality. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 518--YESHUA Returns

 

 

The Need 

 

In a sense, it is the situation with the great tribulation, the threatening danger to the very elect at Petra and the total apocalyptic environment facing the creation which precipitates YESHUA’s return at the precise moment in time when He does appear (as briefly outlined in a former chapter). 

 

As pointed out in the previous comments on this theme, YESHUA said that if He did not come back and stop man’s misrule of this globe (just when He does), then the election (as well as the rest of so-called humanity) would all be in jeopardy of losing their lives (Matt 24:22). 

 

The point is that world conditions are building up to reach a crisis point which will demand that YESHUA return at that precise moment in time in order to save the very elect alive.  Otherwise, all life on this planet will be destroyed (because of man’s mis-management of things). 

 

 

The First Phase of the Return of YESHUA 

 

This backdrop lays the groundwork for the return of The MESSIAH (as briefly cited in preceding chapters).  He does return, perhaps in Yechezkel’s 37th year; but in two phases, as noted previously. 

 

First, He comes to Bozrah to rescue the very elect from the threat of the approaching army of the Beast.  He then takes them and perhaps any of the remaining election still alive to safety at the sea of glass (Rev 15:2).  The resurrection of the elect dead probably occurs here--or later (to be discussed shortly). 

 

This first return will apparently be largely in secret with the limited purpose of rescuing the very elect.  It will be elaborated upon in some detail later on in this chapter and in Appendix E. 

 

 

The Seven Last Plagues 

 

This condition then sets the stage for the seven last plagues or vials to be poured out upon man and the Beast kingdom--apparently over a 30-day period of time (Rev 16:1-21).  In fact, it might be that these plagues start in the 30-day period under discussion and continue for some time thereafter.  While similar to former plagues and trials on man, this one will be considerably different, as will be shortly shown. 

 

The basis of this probable allocation of 30 days hangs on the difference between the conclusion of the 1,260 days of great tribulation against the election and the entrance of YHWH YESHUA into Jerusalem to take possession of that city and end the abomination of desolation which had been set up there for 1,290 days (as briefly touched upon in the prior chapters). 

 

Whereas the great tribulation was Satan’s wrath against the election (that portion which do not qualify for security at the designated place of safety), the seven last plagues represent YHWH’s wrath against the balance of rebellious sinning so-called humanity, functioning under the leadership of the Dragon. 

 

A perusal of these seven last vials suggests that they are essentially upheavals or great catastrophes in nature which are surely the great typical fulfillment of the plagues placed on Egypt at the Exodus (previously outlined) and the first four trumpet messages of the seventh seal of Revelation, during the work of the final two witnesses (Rev 8:1-13). 

 

The first plague might be a pestilence of some sort on so-called humanity while the next two plagues likely are crises vials or plagues, surfacing because of environmental pollution or astronomical conditions involving meteorites, asteroids, etc. 

 

 

Death of the Sun 

 

Vials numbers four and five represent the coming “nova” of the sun.  On viewing the death of a star, early astronomers thought they were observing the birth of a new star when one would seem to come from out of nowhere with an evident brightness very detectable on earth.  Hence, they called this phenomenon a nova (Latin for new or birth). 

 

Over time, astronomers began to realize that they were not observing the birth of a new star; but rather, the death of an old one.  Clearly, all stars (including the sun in this solar system) have a limited life span because of a limited, finite amount of available and usable hydrogen which produces energy through its atomic chain reactions. 

 

Obviously, stars, like our sun, eventually die (nova).  In fact, a report in the July 1999 “Prophetic Observer” (p. 2) indicated that over 30 star novas a year are accidentally seen and reported--just in our Milky Way galaxy alone. 

 

In any case, these reports and statistics are just more proof of the death of a star.  In terms of the universe, the figure of dying stars must be significant annually.  Hence, it is not far fetched to believe that our own sun will go through the process and perhaps soon. 

 

The sun is a median sized star which will one day nova to cause an enormous heating and swelling as it dies (up to 100 times with a comparable release of energy of up to 100 times and an increase in brightness of up to 10 to 12 magnitudes).  Such stars can become “red giants,” although some larger ones can literally explode in time as a super nova, as Betelgeuse is expected to do, discussed in a prior chapter. 

 

This red giant state can last up to one to two weeks before the star undergoes an internal collapse and cooling as it fades out and dies.  This condition of heating (brightness) and then cooling (darkening) has been often associated with the sun in the age end Day of YHWH in numerous Scriptural citations (Isa 9:19; 13:10; 24:23; 30:26; Joel 2:30; 3:14-15; Amos 5:18-20; 8:9; Zech 14:6; Matt 24:29; Rev 16:8-10).  

 

And what will man do in the coming millennium when the sun is dead and produces no light and heat for earth’s inhabitants?  The Book answers this question by declaring that in that day, there won’t be any need for sunlight or even a candle because The EL will be the light (Isa 60:19-20; Rev 22:5). 

 

 

Preparing for the Invasion from the East 

 

Plague number six focuses upon the drying up of the Euphrates for the kings of the East to enter Palestine (Rev 16:12).  This event is now possible with the construction of a huge dam across the Euphrates in modern Syria.  With the flip of a switch, the Euphrates can be dried up. 

 

This event paves the way for the movement of the Eastern army of 200 million men to assemble at Armageddon and to prepare to attack the returned YHWH YESHUA and His elect. 

 

 

A Capsized Earth Plus 

 

The last vial, number seven, seems to address several things--including a great earthquake (Rev 16:18) and a fantastic flip or capsizing of the earth which might produce a brand new axis for the earth’s spin (Rev 16:20). 

 

Thus, when Yohanan wrote about every island having fled away and the mountains were not found (Rev 16:20), the description seems to parallel the modern findings of Hugh Brown, discussed in a former chapter.  Truly, the changing ice caps at the poles will create a wobble which would throw the earth into a capsizing effect, while the earth reacts to create new poles. 

 

Also of note, on this line of discussion, it should be recognized that the planet has been cooling long-term since WWII (though there is evidence currently that it has warmed somewhat during the last several years), despite all of the uproar in the controlled media for 20 years about a warming earth and the greenhouse effect. 

 

Airplanes which crash landed on Greenland’s ice cap in WWII are now under a massive cover of ice.   Presently, the US growing season lessens almost yearly with a fall frost coming earlier and spring being delayed longer each year.  These two factors plainly suggest a cooling earth long term.

 

But again, there is some evidence of warming for the past few years because ice (or at least, the ice in the oceans) seems to now be melting at the poles. 

 

As briefly outlined in a preceding chapter, a report surfaced in mid August 2000 that there is now a stretch of open water at the North Pole (discussed on the Dreamland radio program on Aug 20, 2000).  This theme of present changes in the climate was addressed in some detail in former chapters on climate and weather. 

 

Thus, the evidence is most persuasive that this earth’s climate is changing--perhaps with an ultimate cooling (building up the ice caps) or melting (to cause an imbalance at the poles).  Either event might contribute to the capsizing of the earth, as seen by Yohanan). 

 

But before reaching the capsizing point in time, it is possible that the warm earth advocates will continue to have some media support from the effects of El Nino-La Nina, where much of the Pacific Ocean is warmed considerably, as happened in 1998-2002.  This phenomenon was noted in a former chapter.  Again, it must be acknowledged as seeming to cause some warming. 

 

There is also the question of increased heat emissions from the sun as it prepares to nova.  If these conditions continue, it is possible that there could be some more ice meltings near the poles which could cause some flooding problems short term and also could contribute to a capsized earth. 

 

 

Giant Hail Stones 

 

The final aspect of this seventh vial occurs when giant hail stones, weighing a talent (over 85 pounds, “Concordant Commentary on the New Testament,” p. 399), strike earth (Rev 16:21).  This will be an extraordinary event (maybe the typical of Josh 10:11). 

 

Perhaps as a prelude to this hail storm, Spain experienced “balls of ice” weighting nine pounds each for a ten day period from Jan 10-20, 2000 (discussed on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio talk show program on Jan 21, 2000).  A few days later, similar ice balls fell in China and Italy.  One of the ice blocks in Italy weighed 11 pounds. 

 

 

YESHUA’s Phase II Return

 

After the seven last plagues (or while they are in process), YESHUA returns in a phase two to the Mount of Olives with the election (possibly all of the election of all three harvests--Passover, Pentecost and firstfruits of Tabernacles) to enter Jerusalem with the help of Eliyahu (Zech 14:4-11; Matt 24:30-31; Mk 13:26; Lu 21:27; Rev 19:14-21). 

 

The portion of the Sukkot election that is dead at His first return (to Bozrah) might be resurrected then to go to the Sea of Glass.  Alternatively, they could come up with His next return, depending upon however I Thessalonians 4:16 is to be interpreted.  This writer is suspicious that the elect dead will probably be resurrected when YESHUA comes for Philadelphia and the elect still alive. 

 

In any case, the Mount of Olives seems to split in two in some manner with His arrival (Zech 14:4), perhaps from an earthquake or some other geologic phenomenon.  While a giant earthquake is the best explanation, there might be some other cause as well.  For example, the Dead Sea area has been slowly sinking even further below sea level in the past several years. 

 

A news report said that the Dead Sea area (which is 1,360 feet below sea level) has been dropping as much as 2.5 inches per year from 1992 to 1999 (Jan 25, 2002, “The Week,” p. 18).  What this drop means is unclear but it could relate to Zekharyah’s words on the coming Day of YHWH.  Once on the Mount of Olives, YESHUA is prepared to enter Jerusalem. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 519--The Jews and The Coming MESSIAH

 

 

The 13 Ani Ma’amin 

 

A former chapter on Judaism outlined some remarks from the Jul-Aug 2000 “Petah Tikvah” magazine (p. 3) which offered a presentation on the thirteen principles of faith commonly found among religious Jews from all around the world.  They are called the “Ani Ma’amin” or I believe principles. 

 

As noted in those comments, these articles are very ancient and have had poems and prayers composed about them for vast ages.  They are profoundly important to both true Jews and true believers in YESHUA. 

 

Almost a thousand years ago, the great Jewish sage Moshe Ben Maimon (Maimonides, affectionately called Ranbam) wrote about them.  For article twelve, Maimonides wrote:  “I believe with prefect faith in the coming of the Messiah.  Though he tarry, nevertheless I await for him every day, knowing that he will come” (Feb 2003 “Yavoh He is Coming,” p. 3). 

 

Manifestly, this has been one of the key articles of faith of all religious Jews for the past 2,600 years, following the fall of Jerusalem to the Babylonians in about 554 BCE.  While the Jews failed to recognize Him and His presence in the first century CE, they will have it right on His final return in the age end. 

 

Accordingly, Jew hating Christians would do well to spend some time trying to ascertain and understand Jewish thinking on this subject.  After all, the Jews may know some things about The Coming MESSIAH which have completely escaped Christian thinking over the years. 

 

 

Monte Judah, Revisited 

 

A preceding chapter quoted Messianic Jew Monte Judah and his Feb 2003 “Yavoh He is Coming” periodical, and an article on “The Yiddish Cup” which was devoted to Judaism’s concept and thinking on the coming of The MESSIAH.  Judah offered an excellent summary of this thinking which is interestingly very close to the Scriptural truth which one can ascertain from the Tanakh prophets. 

 

 

The Setting 

 

A preceding chapter addressed the question of dating the age end with a discussion on the concept of hastening the day, to include commentary by Christian Identity leader Peter J. Peters, Messianic Jewish scholar Dr David Stern, the above cited Monte Judah, and the first century CE Apostle Kefa (in II Pet 3:11-12). 

 

The essence of those remarks was that indeed The MOST HIGH does have a time schedule in place which will be followed to the letter.  But assuredly, we must work hard at anticipating, expecting and preparing for the return of YHWH YESHUA.  Therefore, true believers must do their part to hasten that day and pray that He will come at the prescribed time. 

 

The enormous depravity, sin, and evil prevailing over earth have been described in former chapters.  And this is one of the realties of the next coming of YHWH YESHUA.  World conditions will reach the point that stupid, rebellious, evil men will be about to the point of destroying all life on this planet (Rev 11:18).  Consequently, YESHUA must return to save the very elect alive (Matt 24:22). 

 

In terms of so-called humanity, the great tribulation will be in full force against the election generally and the people who obey the mitzwot of The ELOHIM especially.  This condition is amply established in the Book, and assuredly in Matthew 24:21 and Revelation 12:17. 

 

 

The Jewish Perception 

 

In the Feb 2003 “Yavoh He is Coming” (p. 9), Monte Judah broached the prevailing crisis state on earth immediately preceding YESHUA’s return with a question-- “What the world will do just before the  Messiah comes?” 

 

From the view of Judaism, the world will be in much travail and tribulation.  Judah gives it as “the birthpangs of the Messiah” (the “chevlei Maashiah”).  In terms of Yisrael, it will be Yakov’s Trouble.  And in Christian eyes, it will be the great tribulation (which many Christians look upon and anticipate to occur on the Jews after the Christians are raptured off to heaven). 

 

While there seems to be some differences in the perception of religious Jews and religious Christians on the audience involved in the great tribulation, both factions agree upon a coming great tribulation and trial on man generally and on Yisrael particularly. 

 

Importantly, Monte Judah highlights the Jewish idea that The MESSIAH will deliver the Jews (correctly, in the Word, the focus is on Yisrael) from the great tribulation and trial which they face (ibid, p. 4-5).  Thus, per Judah, The MESSIAH will lead the Jews (Israel) in a great age ending Exodus (to fulfill the prophetic aspects of the Exodus in the book of Exodus). 

 

Judah notes that in the Hebrew, Egypt is Mitzrayim; which, in the plural, means “trials and tribulations.”  Hence, in the next coming Exodus for Yisrael, YHWH YESHUA will lead Yisrael out of the prevailing great trial and tribulation upon the earth (thus, out of Mitzrayim, or the plural of Egypt). 

 

 

How Judaism Views The Coming MESSIAH 

 

Monte Judah goes on to explain the Jewish views on The Coming MESSIAH (ibid, p. 5-9).  To do this, Judah lists some seven perceptions. 

 

First, Jews expect The MESSIAH to come as a man and an Israelite, as promised by Moshe (Deut 18:15-20).  Next, Jews anticipate that The Coming MESSIAH will be a Son of David (Isa 11:10).  Yes, in the NT, YESHUA was A Son of David (Matt 22:42; Rom 15:12). 

 

Thirdly, per the Jews, The Coming MESSIAH will be anointed with the Spirit of The MOST HIGH (Isa 11:1-5; 61:1-2).  And fourthly, The Coming MESSIAH will be A Servant of The ELOHIM (Isa 49:5-7).  Thus, He is to raise up the tribes of Yisrael and deliver them from the great tribulation and restore them in Palestinian Yisrael. 

 

The Jews look for the fifth feature of this faith to mean that The Coming MESSIAH will be The Faithful Shepherd (Ezek 34:23; 37:21-24).  Yes, He is The Good Shepherd Who will watch over, protect and deliver the sheep of Yisrael (Jo 10:11-16). 

 

For number six, Judaism teaches that The Coming MESSIAH will be The Greatest Torah Teacher (Isa 2:3; Mic 4:2).  The same message appears in the New Testament (Matt 5:17-19).  And for the seventh feature, Judah notes that The Coming MESSIAH will lead all nations (Ps 2:2-9).  This same message surfaces in the NT (Rev 12:5; 19:15). 

 

 

What The MESSIAH Will Do 

 

This writer’s interpretation of what YESHUA will immediately do after His return will be addressed in the following chapter.  In the meantime, Monte Judah did outline and present an overview of the big picture of what The MESSIAH will do after His return, per Judaism. 

 

First, The Returned MESSIAH will restore the Bet Hamikdash (the Temple--I Kg 5:5).  Secondly, He will gather the exiles of Yisrael (to include both the Houses of Yehudah and Yisrael) and restore them to the land of Yisrael (Deut 30:3-4).  And thirdly, He will resurrect the dead (Ezek 37:12-14).  Next, The Coming MESSIAH will cause all men on earth to know The ELOHIM (Jer 31:34). 

 

For number five, The Returning MESSIAH will bring an end to sin and evil (Jer 50:20; Zeph 3:13; Zech 13:2; Mal 4:1). 

 

The sixth issue stipulates that when The MESSIAH comes He will lead all men into the right worship of EL SHADDAI (Isa 2:3; Mic 4:2; Zech 14:16).  Yes, it will be quite a shock to surviving Christian Identity sun worshipers when they have to give up their sun worship and start observing and keeping the marvelous festival of Sukkot (Zech 14:16, 19). 

 

And last, The Coming MESSIAH will rule the world in peace (Ezek 37:26; Zech 14:9).  With His government and dominion, the evils and sins of the Adamic governorship of planet earth will come to an end.  Righteousness will prevail all over the world. 

 

As Monte Judah concluded, these seven expectations will constitute the reality of the Messianic era on planet earth once YESHUA returns.  He notes that not only are these expected realties something which religious Jews hope for, but they are likewise the hope and expectations of Messianic believers. 

 

And this writer agrees with Monte Judah.  These expectations are the essence of the faith of all of the people of truth for the last several thousand years.  They are not an exclusive teaching of modern Messianic believers today.  They have been shared by true religious Jews for centuries. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 520--After YESHUA Returns

 

 

He Enters Jerusalem 

 

After defeating the Beast army at Bozrah and securing the very elect at Petra and removing them to the Sea of Glass, The MESSIAH does return visibly before the world to the Mount of Olives, as described in former chapters.  Once YESHUA and His election and messengers are on the Mount of Olives, He is ready to enter Jerusalem again for the first time since He was murdered there almost 2,000 years ago. 

 

By the time of YESHUA’s entrance into Jerusalem, the Third Temple will probably have been further damaged or destroyed (probably on the 9th or 10th day of the 5th month of Yechezkel’s 37th year) by the (European) beast man and false prophet (the pope), who are ultimately captured and hurled into the lake of fire (the volcanically active Dead Sea). 

 

However, Satan escapes to assemble his various armies to attack YESHUA (to include the Gog/Magog forces in the East--to prompt them to begin to move West and eventually cross the Euphrates, following the effect of the 6th vial--Rev 16:12). 

 

With YHWH YESHUA and the election (evidently all 603,550 of them, including the women) in Jerusalem, work commences some 45 days later at the start of Hanukkah (25th day of the 9th month) to clean the Temple Mount site and prepare an altar so that the daily sacrifice can commence--perhaps at the conclusion of Hanukkah (around the 3rd day of the 10th month, I Macc 4:52-59). 

 

 

Securing the Promised Land 

 

As YESHUA enters the promise land, He and His returning army must fight a series of battles in order to gain possession of the promised land in the grant to Avraham. 

 

This land grant to Avraham probably includes a huge territory from the river of Egypt (the Nile?) to the Euphrates.  As noted elsewhere herein, this grant could include all of the Sinai, present Palestine, Asia Minor, the Arabian peninsula and everything to the Euphrates. 

 

In this grant, YESHUA will not only be faced with the Beast and his army; but also, there will be a need to deal with the peoples now living in this territory (mainly Arabs, Turks, etc).  Many or most of them will probably be righteously slaughtered by YESHUA, or they will be expelled from the Avrahamic land grant (in that they will be illegally occupying land that does not belong to them). 

 

In either case, there is quite a military effort to gain and secure this land because of the sure opposition from its various inhabitants.  Much of this grant is prophetically in the vein of Egypt and/or the Muslim King of the South.  In the Yechezkel ante-type, YHWH used the Babylonians to destroy the remnants of Egypt and the Edomite Tyre (Ezek 26-28).  Nebuchadnezzar was YHWH’s servant in this judgment. 

 

Ezekiel 29:1 opens with a date of the 12th day of the 10th moon of Yehoyakhin’s 10th year of captivity and the judgment upon the peoples living in much of the promised land (in the vein that much of it is referred to as Egypt). 

 

While it is probable that the Beast clears some of these people before YESHUA returns, much work will remain after He returns (perhaps starting in the 8th moon of Yechezkel’s 37th year, as the various nations begin to attack Him in Jerusalem). 

 

This whole effort will intensify as Satan and his demonic horde are able to induce and motivate most or all of these peoples in the Middle East to attack YESHUA and the elect in Jerusalem. 

 

 

More 

 

Certainly, this judgment of killing or expelling these wrongful inhabitants continues from Ezekiel 29 through 33, in the vein of a judgment upon Egypt and Pharaoh (who is symbolic of Satan) and the other Middle Eastern nations.  In the ante-type, Babylon carried out this judgment completely.  Maybe in the type, the Beast power will start it and YESHUA will finish it. 

 

As described in a prior chapter, the ante-types of YESHUA’s return were apparently covered in the books of Joshua and Maccabees, as they outlined events when Yisrael entered the land and/or cleansed the land.  Clearly, YESHUA returns in the fall of Yechezkel’s 37th year and probably enters Jerusalem in Bul of that year.  The MESSIAH then faces a war of perhaps three and one-half years (as pointed out previously). 

 

The further attacks from or upon these evil usurpers in the land must be done by YESHUA after He returns--in order to clear the land and prepare it for the return of the House of Yisrael and the reunification of Yisrael and Yehudah (Ezek 33-37).  As noted earlier, it appears that The MESSIAH captures or secures Jerusalem in the fall or winter of Yechezkel’s 37th year. 

 

There is one important point in this presentation which deserves some comment.  Ezekiel 32 seems to be a judgment upon Satan and the various nations involved in war with YESHUA late in the 12th year (Yechezkel’s 37th year). 

 

Verse 18 apparently casts Satan and his hordes of attackers into the pit as a part of a funeral dirge.  If Satan and these nations are truly judged at this time, then it would seem that all of the rebellion on earth might end then.  However, maybe this is not the correct interpretation--because the Gog and Magog conflict is still future after Yechezkel’s 37th year. 

 

As discussed earlier, the “Soncino Books of the Bible” (p. 217) notes that the dirge involved is uttered before the actual events occur.  Since this dating is in the 12th moon of Yechezkel’s 37th year, it would suggest that Satan’s final judgment might occur later (as it does not seem to take place until after the finality of Ezekiel 38-39). 

 

Just as Yehoshua had to fight a continuing war upon entering Canaan land, it appears that YESHUA and His army face a similar situation when He returns.  He must fight a series of battles with the Beast army and the usurper inhabitants of the land in order to clear it by executing His righteous judgment upon the people living there illegally and those others who try to intervene (as in the Gog/Magog conflict). 

 

 

Yisrael Comes Home 

 

At some point in time, after YESHUA enters Jerusalem, the process of recovering fleshly Israelites out in the Diaspora will commence in earnest.  Thus, Yisrael will come home to Palestine.  This undertaking will probably take some time and not be an instantaneous operation. 

 

But likely, it will start about the time that YESHUA enters Jerusalem--surely, with the election in Yechezkel’s 37th year.  Since this clearance and the related war with the various nations in the Middle East do not end until later, it seems reasonable to anticipate the return of fleshly Yisrael after YESHUA’s return (possibly in Yechezkel’s 38th year); but certainly, before the Gog/Magog war. 

 

The prophet Hosea perhaps had some insight on this return of the election when he wrote that in the place where it was said (of Israelites) that they were not YHWH’s people, it shall be said to them (evidently of the returning Yisrael [or perhaps of just the generic election], then or later, and certainly by the time of the start of the millennium) that they are the sons of The Living EL (Hos 1:10). 

 

Obviously, the place where Israelites became “not His people” was Canaan land.  In a future time and return, they will be called “His people” at this exact same place.  This is a most interesting prophecy in view of the fact that so many Christians claim to be His people now in various places around the world.  Per Hosea’s remarks, maybe they misunderstand their true status. 

 

There seems to be several ancient references to this event which might allow the dating of this return (Ezek 36:8; 37:1-23; Jer 3:14; I Macc 5:17-23).  The book of I Maccabees is perhaps one of the best guides on the chronology of what happens after YESHUA returns.  In that production, Judas Maccabees pre-figured the work of YESHUA when He returns to establish His government over earth. 

 

As I Maccabees 5:17-23 indicate, the rescue and/or recovery of most of the true Israelite Jews scattered in the area of Palestine commenced in the year following the restoration of true worship on Mount Moriah. 

 

If YESHUA returns in Yechezkel’s 37th year, the case can be made that most of the surviving House of Yisrael Israelites out in the Diaspora will be recovered and returned to the land of Yisrael in Yechezkel’s 38th year (while this return may start in Yechezkel’s 38th year, it may not end until the 39th year). 

 

As discussed earlier, archeologist and scholar Vendyl Jones suggests that this question of identification of fleshly Israelites will be accomplished by using the Urim and Tummim (Mar 2002 “Vendyl Jones Research Institutes Researcher,” p. 2). 

 

 

The Real Gog and Magog Invasion 

 

This condition then sets the stage for the Gog and Magog invasion by the kings of the East--which starts against Jerusalem perhaps near the end of the three and one-half years’ war (by Yechezkel’s 41st year, as described in a previous chapter). 

 

While there have been numerous attempts to identify the Gog and/or Magog powers, Marvin Antelman offers perhaps one of the best and most interesting conclusions.  He says that Gog and Magog identify with Russia and Germany in the West and China and Japan in the East (“To Eliminate the Opiate,” p. 43). 

 

Certainly, most observers link Gog and Magog in some way to Russia and China.  This writer leans in the direction that the ante-type of this attack probably does involve the old Assyrians--White Russia and the Baltic states (and perhaps Germany).  However, in the final, age-ending type, it likely will consist of the kings of the East (to include China, Japan, etc). 

 

The Gog and Magog attack evidently continues until fire from heaven finally destroys this Eastern army and her many allies in a second mass death, to fulfill the prophetic aspects of the flood (Ezek 38:1-17; 39:1-8; Zech 14:12-17; Rev 20:7-9, 14-15; 21:8).  Possibly, the seven last plagues are still occurring in some manner to precipitate the final destruction of this army. 

 

Thus, the vials may last more than 30 days.  Or they might fulfill what happened with Yisrael at the Exodus.  In those times, the plagues came upon Egypt in year one of the Exodus.  Yet, there was some lingering presence of those problems which surfaced as late as Yehoshua’s battle with the Amorites (Josh 10:11).   

 

Satan (as the water beast) is probably then judged, as discussed above (Pharaoh was an ante-type at Ezek 21:1-16; Rev 20:10).  Thus, there was the earlier funeral dirge over Satan and the nations--likely on the 15th day of the 12th month (Ezek 32:17-32). 

 

It is not totally clear to this writer when the actual Gog attack takes place (although probably by Yechezkel’s 41st year, as noted above) and how long it lasts.  Manifestly, it takes seven months to bury the dead and Gog’s weapons (nuclear?) provide fuel for Yisrael for the next seven years (Ezek 39:9-16). 

 

 

The Remaining Fleshly Israelites Return To Canaan 

 

Either with YHWH YESHUA’s phase two return with the election to the Mount of Olives in Bul of Yechezkel’s 37th year (Zech 14:4); or thereafter, the remaining physical Israelites, still alive, will certainly be recovered from all over the world in the ultimate typical fulfillment of the Exodus (Ezek 34:11-31).  They will be brought to the Jerusalem and/or Yisrael area. 

 

While it is unclear exactly when this recovery occurs, it must happen soon after YESHUA clears the land (maybe by Sukkot in Yechezkel’s 38th year).  Probably, the last vestiges of Yakov’s Trouble ends when the last of physical Yisrael is returned to the land.  In the next Jubilee (2015-2016), Israelites may receive their new allocations of land in the promised grant (Ezek 45:1). 

 

There is one remaining unsettled question about these Israelites, who will still be in the flesh, but who will have been cleaned up somewhat by Yakov’s Trouble and the great tribulation.  This issue addresses the possible number of these fleshly Israelites who will be privileged to live on unto the kingdom age of the millennium (without first receiving reconciliation, change and translation, as will happen with the election). 

 

Without being dogmatic, the writer of this study has kicked that question around some and come up with a “possible” number and some logic to support it.  In terms of the present populations of the now existing House of Yisrael nations, their gross population presently is probably in the neighborhood of something around a half of a billion or so. 

 

However, the contemporary House of Yisrael nations have vast numbers of non-Israelites present right now in 2003--including the behemah, the chaiyah and numerous mamzer and nokri/nekar strangers. 

 

It’s hard to say how many of these non-Israelites are present, but they are surely in excess of half of the gross populations.  So, at the best, it might be that there are something like 240,000,000 true Israelites in the world today (this is likely a top figure). 

 

 

The Pomegranates Revisited 

 

But most of those Israelites will die in the coming trouble, leaving the basic question of how many might survive in the flesh to reach the millennium.  The answer to this dilemma may relate in some way to the previous discussion of the pomegranate trees adorning the Temple.  That number was put at 400, per the Word. 

 

The prior presentation on this theme noted that “if” each pomegranate carries the numerical value of each talent of silver (in the Tabernacle’s construction), then it might be that the pomegranates equate to something like 1.2 million (3,000 times 400).  But what is this 1.2 million number? 

 

The Scriptures place the number of Israelite males, over 20 years of age, who had to pay the redemption silver at 603,550 men as established earlier (Num 1:46).  Various scholars and students of the Word have taken this number and used a little logic and came up with a like number of males under the age of 20 and the aged and infirmed. 

 

This then takes one to the spot where it can be reasonably assumed that the male Israelites in the Exodus consisted of something around 1.2 million (which is 100,000 times 12).  If one then doubles the male numbers to cover the present females, he or she comes to something in excess of 2,400,000 Israelites in the Exodus. 

 

A later census, just before entering Canaan, put the figure at 601,730 males over 20 (Num 26:51 mentioned earlier) which will give one about the same results.  This has to be a most interesting figure when the student of truth looks again at the arithmetic associated with the pomegranate trees. 

 

A still later census, as made by David, put the number of men of military age in Yisrael at 1.1 million--just before he established the kingdom officials, discussed earlier (I Chron 21:5).  But this unauthorized census done by David evidently did not include Yehudah, Levi or Binyamin (I Chron 21:5-6).  Otherwise, the number is interesting in view of its proximity to David’s organization of his kingdom officials.  

 

 

Will One Percent Survive? 

 

Therefore, is it possible that just as there were around 1.2 million male Israelites entering Canaan, under Yehoshua (the 1.2 million figure may possibly include the 144,000 age ending election, although the 144,000 probably will be a separate definition, as they will likely be translated to immortality), to receive an allotment of land that this same number might be prophetic of the age end Exodus? 

 

Could it be that there will be a similar number of male Israelites; who, still in the flesh, will return to Canaan and receive their millennial allotment of land (Ezek 45:1--in the next Jubilee, just as Yehoshua’s division happened in 70 earlier Jubilees). 

 

To get at the total number of Israelites (male and female), all one has to do is to double the number of the males.  Hence, it might be that some 2.4 million Israelites (in the world today) will be present to enter Canaan, as their ancestors similarly did some 3,500 years ago. 

 

If the present world population of Israelites is around 240 million, as calculated formerly, then it might well be that only some one percent of them (2.4 million) will survive to enter Canaan land and be in the kingdom during the millennium.  The rest will all die in the coming trouble. 

 

While there is the election of the 144,000 males (who will be changed to immortality), it might also be possible to appreciate a type of election of this 2.4 million Israelites.  Hence, beyond the NT election of the 144,000 males and a probable like number of females for the firstfruits of Sukkot, there can be a type of election of Israelites in the flesh and particularly so since Yisrael is the elect race. 

 

Hence, it is possible that the pomegranate trees represent something different and bigger than just the elect 144,000.  It could be the number of fleshly Israelites privileged to live into the millennial kingdom under YHWH YESHUA’s government.  The writer of this study is merely throwing these figures out as things to think about.  Of course, it could all be wrong.  But the numbers are intriguing. 

 

This one percent figure is also significant in terms of the ante-type that occurred with the fall of Jerusalem to the Romans in 70 CE.  Josephus reports that 1,100,000 persons died in Jerusalem in the siege and 97,000 captives were taken in the war (“Josephus, The Essential Writings,” p. 367).  Most of the captives went into slavery.  There were a minute number of persons, like Josephus, who found freedom. 

 

Previous comments have noted the Great Pyramid of Giza, some of its features and its possible construction by Iyov.  Importantly, it may have been built under guidance and inspiration from YHWH to serve as a powerful, far-reaching witness on earth (Job 38:6-7; Isa 19:19-20; Jer 32:20).  In any examination of the features of the Great Pyramid, one is inevitably struck with the incredible numbers associated with its construction. 

 

In his video on “Back Door to the New World Order,” New Zealander Barry Smith noted that the Great Pyramid is constructed with 2.4 million blocks of granite.  Originally, it was encased with 144,000 limestone slabs/slats which made it literally shine in the sunlight.  In the relevance of all of the numbers involved in the Great Pyramid’s architecture, is it possible that the 2.4 million and 144,000 features are important? 

 

 

The Millennial Future 

 

Will the remaining dead Israelites (billions of them still in their graves) be resurrected to life and reconciled and converted by The ELOHIM during the millennium?  This possibility seems highly plausible.  In fact, it is even possible that all of the dead in Adam may see life and reconciliation then as well. 

 

The point of all of this is that not only will there be spiritually changed and saved (translated) Israelites in YHWH YESHUA’s kingdom, but there will be human Israelites still in the flesh.  With any sins, these fleshly Israelites will have to make the proper sacrifice at the millennial Temple and learn to start obeying YAH’s laws which establish and define sin. 

 

Of course, early on, the great marriage supper of The LAMB takes place to effect the New Covenant between YHWH YESHUA and the Houses of Yehudah and Yisrael.  With this coming marriage, something will happen that has never occurred before in history.  Yisrael will learn to stop sinning (Ezek 43:7-9). 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 521--Duality in the Age End I

 

 

The Age End Prophetic Fulfillments 

 

There are a lot of complications in interpreting the age end prophecies.  One of the difficulties is that prophecy is dual or repetitive and allows for at least two or more fulfillments, as noted earlier.  This fact has been elaborated upon by a number of students of the Word over the years. 

 

But the age end has a particular system of duality which should be understood by students of truth.  This doubling happens primarily because Satan comes to earth as “Jesus Christ” to establish the supposed millennial rule about 3 1/2 years or so before The Real MESSIAH returns to establish His true Millennial reign. 

 

Now, there are a host of prophetic references giving an abundance of detail associated with YESHUA’s return.  In order to cause confusion among evil people (so that they will believe the lie), it “appears” that many of those prophecies relating to YESHUA’s real return will be duplicated in a manner linked to Satan and his arrival. 

 

For example, a final, deadly wound and its healing will occur in connection with the Beast power in the age end (Rev 13:12-14).  But before this one comes, an ante-type of it will happen earlier to authenticate Satan’s arrival.  Frankly, this writer sees the wounding of the Communist USSR and its likely restoration or revival as being possibly the ante-type now on the horizon. 

 

Probably, another ante-typical fulfillment of the healing of the deadly wound prophecy of the Beast power occurs when a United Europe rises up out of the ashes and despair of WWIII to lead and spearhead a global confederation of all nations (the UN).  The deadly wound reasonably happened with the fall of the Roman, world ruling empire.  The healing of the deadly wound likely means a resurrection of that empire. 

 

 

Several Ante-types of the Deadly Wound and Its Healing 

 

In terms of the age end, perhaps two of the most important players of all will be the Roman Catholic Church and the just noted United Europe.  These two entities were discussed in some detail in previous chapters.  But for now, some points will be made to demonstrate the incredible presence of enormous duality and repetitiveness associated with the relevant prophecies on both of these entities. 

 

Hence, the deadly wound prophecy will have still other ante-types to complicate the issue. 

 

It will certainly also be duplicated in the age end in the context of the woman who rides the Beast (Rev 17:3).  This one had a fulfillment over the past 2,000 years, when the woman (the Roman Catholic Church) was wounded to death (in the Protestant Reformation and during Napoleon’s day). 

 

This healing of the deadly wound inflicted upon the Roman Church will be effected in the age end when the daughter Christian Churches come back to mother Rome (which is happening right now, in the guise of the gigantic and powerful Christian ecumenical movement.  It will eventually encompass most or all of the world’s religions, under a New Age format, as discussed formerly). 

 

Interestingly, the impetus for this healing of Rome is being fueled by the Pentecostal-Charismatic movement where all of the faithful (Catholic and Protestant Pentecostals-Charismatics) can come together and jointly mutter their demonically inspired gibberish in a state of emotional ecstasy. 

 

But all of these events seem to be effectively ante-types of what the real prophecy focuses upon in Revelation 13:3 and 12.  The wording in the prophecy seems to  concern one of the heads of the Beast and not the Beast, per se. 

 

 

The Beast Man 

 

Thus, there is surely another aspect and the real one for the deadly wound prophecy and its healing.  It surely must concern the coming Beast man ruler of the eventually restored Roman Empire.  In the way the prophecy reads (Rev 13:3, 12), the case must be made that the subject concerns the Beast man and not necessarily his government or the woman who rides it. 

 

In the sense that a ruler can almost be one with his government, the Beast man is perhaps synonymous or almost synonymous with the Beast power.  In any case, a number of students of the Word over the years have read those texts in Revelation and have concluded that the deadly wound and its healing does address the Beast man. 

 

Other comments herein suggest that the real Beast man will possibly be Constantine II, King of the Hellenes.  He was wounded to death in 1967 when his kingdom was stripped from him and he was exiled.  This wound will surely be healed if he is brought back to power--perhaps first in Greece, before assuming power later over a United Europe and still later over the world (which he will rule from a restored Babylon). 

 

Is this wounding and healing of this Beast man the real fulfillment of Revelation 13:3 and 12 or alternatively does it concern the wounding of the old Roman Empire and the woman and their restoration here in the age end? 

 

This writer will not argue the point either way since the prophecy has much duality in fulfillment.  Probably, the Beast man, as the final horn, has the most Scriptural support.  Hence, the events associated with the Beast power and the woman are just ante-types. 

 

 

Bill Clinton 

 

This mentioning of Constantine II brings up a need to mention what now appears to be another ante-type of this prophecy, in the sense of another connection with a man who most students of the Book would never associate with the coming Beast man, world ruler.  Here, the issue is former President Bill Clinton--who is right now trying his level best to be the coming world ruler. 

 

Clinton certainly faced a wounding in what seemed to be his political death in the Monica Lewinsky affair in 1998.  But interestingly, this wound was healed in the 1998 elections and with his acquittal in the Senate.  He remained in power in the US. 

 

Another wounding happened to Slick when he left office in January 2001.  This looked like his end.  But this writer allows that he could easily come back with a new constitution or a Hillary presidency/vice-presidency. 

 

In any case, Slick will make an effort at world rulership--which will ultimately fail (this is one of the reasons why Clinton has sold the US out so often and so much in support of the UN, internationalism and almost all motions for global government.  Clinton would like to be the UN Secretary General, whose office is to become the world’s governor). 

 

Clinton hoodwinked the American public for eight years.  However, many international leaders were not and are not so impressed with him.  They would likely never support him for anything of importance (although he is busy trying to drum up support since he left the US presidency).  But we’ll have to wait and see.  Bill “Slick” Clinton’s personal links to the prophetic Beast man will be addressed in a later appendix. 

 

 

Some Scriptures 

 

As just noted, the woman riding the Beast system or power of Revelation 17:3-18 is the Roman Catholic Church.  The beast she rides is the Roman Empire which seems to be the Beast power at Revelation 13:1.  The woman and Beast are almost synonymous, but not totally. 

 

Suffice to say, the Roman Empire not only ruled and controlled much of Europe, but also most of the civilized world in Asia and Africa as well.  It’s possible to almost say the same thing for the woman who later rode it.  Catholicism certainly ruled Europe and indeed many other countries as well. 

 

The classic, old, Roman Empire vanished around 476 CE when Odoacer sacked Rome and deposed Romulus Augustulus, last Roman emperor in the West.  Efforts continued in the Holy Roman Empire (under Catholic leadership) to reunite the old empire.  But this work never really achieved total success.

 

The ten toes of Daniel’s image (of Rome) were being held together by the miry clay of the Catholic religion.  But the pieces would not totally cleave together (Dan 2:41-43). Thus, the image was both strong and weak.  This was the condition of the Holy Roman Empire for 1,260 years.    

 

However, the Revelation 13 Beast is really more complex because it could have dual application, both as the Roman Empire and the Beast man who has ruled her or tried to rule her (although both the horns and heads refer to geographical divisions, as well as to the men or kings who have ruled the government or tried to rule it). 

 

 

Some Interesting History 

 

Importantly, the ancient, united Roman Empire was made up of these ten kingdoms or geographical entities--Alemanni, Ostrogoths, Visigoths, Franks, Vandals, Suevi, Burgundians, Heruli, Anglo-Saxons and Lombards.  Probably, age end Rome will also have a ten division of Europe (which perhaps will not include Britain). 

 

Moreover, there is also the developing division of the world in the form of ten geographical entities (as was described in a former chapter on Internationalism).  The Club of Rome first ignited this action some years ago.  It likely will be the ultimate, typical fulfillment of the ten divisions of the final Beast government on earth to precede the return of YESHUA. 

 

There is another feature of ten which is relevant.  In attempts to reunite and heal the wound of 476 CE, some ten kings or rulers have or will arrive on the scene--like Justinian (554 CE), Charlemagne (800), Otto--the Great (962), Frederick Barbarossa (1152-1190), Charles V (1520), Louis XIV (1661-1715), Napoleon Bonaparte (1804), Adolf Schicklgruber/Hitler (1939-1945) and two more to come. 

 

In must be noted that in all of these efforts to unite and restore the Roman Empire, the Roman Catholic Church has played a pivotal part (especially, in the vein of the Holy Roman Empire).  The Catholic Church was always in the background pushing and prodding the secular leaders to unite. 

 

In the 1930s and 1940s, with Adolf Schicklgruber and the Nazi movement, there was the same interplay.  Because of this, the German Nazis entered into a Concordant (in accord) with the Roman Catholic Church.  The Germans even taxed their people and paid the tax or tithe to the Roman Church.  Since WWII, the Church has tried to distance herself from the Nazi past.  But it is the real world. 

 

 

More on the Beast 

 

The number nine ruler will serve only a short time before the age end, classic, Beast man, number ten, shows up to truly unite Europe (likely Constantine II, King of the Hellenes, mentioned above). 

 

Though Clinton is no European, could he make this number nine effort, at least in the sense of trying to unite the world and rule it?  Or will this ninth effort come from someone else, perhaps in Europe? 

 

As discussed above, this writer finds it hard to believe that anyone of importance internationally would support Clinton for anything.  Thus, the number nine effort for unification more likely will come from someone else (like probably the reported tax collector of Daniel 11:20). 

 

The number “seven” has numerous fulfillments.  For example, there have been historically six, real powerful, classic, Beast men rulers in history who vigorously oppressed and persecuted YHWH’s people in the form of great tribulation.  They were Cain, Nimrod, Pharaoh, Nebuchadnezzar, Antiochus Epiphanies and Nero.  The seventh one coming seems to be Constantine II. 

 

Moreover, there were three other ante-types of Beast men who opposed righteousness, but who never became outright persecutors of YHWH’s people in the sense of the just discussed seven.  They were Balak, Sennacherib (the Assyrian) and Constantine I.  Sennacherib and Constantine I were world rulers while Balak was not.  Anyway, the six plus one to come is seven and the seven plus three is ten. 

 

While it would be possible to suppose that Constantine I was one of the persecutors of the righteous (in the sense of starting one of the ante-types of the 1,260 days/years of the great tribulation), instead of say Cain, the outline appears likely correct, as given, because when Yohanan wrote Revelation 17:10, five of these rulers had been, one was and one was to come. 

 

Nero was then the Beast man in Yohanan’s day and following him, there is only one to come.  So Nero was the last one to precede the one coming in the age end. 

 

Though Constantine I was a very evil man and though he imposed perhaps the start of one of the important ante-typical fulfillments of the great tribulation for 1,260 years in the form of his mandatory Sunday rest edict in 321 CE (as discussed earlier), he may not have been as evil and tyrannical as the seven named above. 

 

After all, when Constantine first came to power, he published a toleration edict which not only ended the formal tribulation upon Christians, but temporarily allowed a measure of religious freedom.  Other rulers following him were also evil men.  It’s just that their evil perhaps did not measure up to the evils associated with the seven Beast men in history. 

 

 

More Dual Features 

 

Significantly, Rome had seven different types of government--Monarchical (753-509 BCE), Praetorsor Consuls (509-31 BCE), Dictatorial, Decemvirate, Triumvirate, Imperial (31-476 CE), and the Holy Roman Empire (c538-1798 CE).  Again, in Revelation 17:10, Yohanan said that there was five kings who had been, one was (Imperial Rome) and one was to come (Holy Roman Empire). 

 

There will be an eighth one which really is of the seven (Rev 17:11).  This one is still the one to come.  It will probably be an outgrowth of the seventh one and yet have characteristics of all seven of them. 

 

In terms of the Beast men, this same reference applies, as outlined above.  Five had been (Cain to Antiochus Epiphanies), one was (Nero) and one was to come (still future here in 2003). 

 

Interestingly, it seems that the man (likely Constantine II) who becomes number ten to resurrect the Roman Empire also becomes number seven in the line of rulers who greatly persecuted YHWH’s people (Rev 12:3; 13:1; 17:3). 

 

 

Another Possibility 

 

Before proceeding on from here, the belief of Christian Media publisher James Lloyd (of Jacksonville, OR) must be acknowledged.  Lloyd notes that Kofi Annan, now Secretary-General of the United Nations, is number seven in sequence in that office.  The sixth Secretary-General of the UN was Dr Boutros Boutros Ghali, an Egyptian. 

 

Lloyd apparently has a belief that Dr Ghali will make a come-back as the 8th head of the UN, as arising out of the previous seven.  In that role, he will become the final beast ruler and fulfill Revelation 17:10-11. 

 

While Dr Ghali may or may not become the age end Beast man, it is utterly fascinating that Kofi Annan is now number seven in that office.  As a minimum, that office and the present reality of a number seven occupying it has to logically bear some significance to the over all scheme of things. 

 

 

The Headquarters 

 

The Babylonian, sun worship system of Revelation 17:9 (economic, financial, commercial, religious, social, etc) apparently has had its primary headquarters in these seven cities over time--Babylon, Shushan, Pergamos, Rome, Paris, London and New York. 

 

In the vein of London, a previous chapter noted the reality of The City--a state within a state, as is true with the Vatican in Rome.  What all goes on in The City might be subject to speculation, but it is clear that The City is the headquarters for International banking, gold, and the work of such evil Amalekites as the Rothschilds. 

 

As noted earlier, The City remains as the probable capitol for some part of the Babylonian monetary system (although some of it is also in New York).  While many or most of the Babylonian financial activities have been transferred to New York, maybe London (at least, The City within the city of London) still remains as the primary center for banking, money and gold matters. 

 

New York and probably London will end when the Russians and Chinese destroy these two cities. 

 

In the future, it is likely that the coming secular Beast government will subside at a rebuilt Babylon on the Euphrates (which Saddam Hussein had been busy reconstructing). 

 

The Babylonian religious power will ultimately locate at Jerusalem (with Satan and the Pope). 

 

Finally, the seven heads of Revelation 12:3 probably represent the seven great world ruling empires--Babel (under Nimrod), Egyptian-Sumerian, Assyrian, Babylonian, Medeo-Persian, Grecian and Roman.  Manifestly, a revived Roman Empire will rule the world here in the age end (at least, for awhile, before the Asians and Muslims revolt). 

 

 

Duality in National References 

 

Another aspect of duality surfaces in the prophecies that relate to what would appear to be nations or national groups.  This issue is complicated because these entities differ in terms of exactly who the peoples were historically and are presently, in contrast to the geographical areas those nations possessed, both past and present. 

 

Thus, there were geographical land areas called Babylon, Assyria, Canaan, Persia, Moab, etc.  In historic Scriptural days, these land areas were occupied by peoples called Babylonians, Assyrians, Canaanites, Persians, Moabites, etc.  But just like the people of the House of Yisrael were deported and left the land of Yisrael, so also have many of the peoples in these old national land areas moved on to new land areas. 

 

The people of the old land areas of Yisrael and other Middle Eastern nations are no longer occupying those same sites.  Other peoples are now there.  The people of the House of Yisrael are in new land areas--like most of the other nations in ancient times. 

 

Therefore, the same is true with the Babylonians, Assyrians, Moabites and largely the Canaanites (although many Arabs, Edomites, Jews and Samaritans now present in old Canaan land may racially and ethnically be partially Canaanites--from earlier miscegenation). 

 

Most of the peoples now occupying those old Scriptural lands in the Middle East are now Muslim Arabs, Edomites and sons of Keturah.  Yes, the old land of Babylon is now largely modern Iraq, as now occupied by Arabs, Edomites and children of Keturah. 

 

The people now in Egypt are largely Arabs and not Egyptians (where the ancient Egyptians went is a lengthy issue which cannot be assessed in any detail because of space constraints, but it was cited in a prior chapter). 

 

It’s hard to find any Scripturally mentioned land and people that have not changed over the centuries.  The modern Romans are entirely different people from the Romans of 2,000 years ago (although some modern Italians may have some ancient Roman genes from miscegenation). 

 

Consequently, in trying to interpret prophecy, one must be ever cognizant that a prophecy about Babylon may apply to the old geographical area of Babylon or the modern peoples living in that area or it may link to the Babylonian people now living in a new Babylon land area or some other definition of Babylon--like its religious, cultural, economic or other systems (now present in the Western civilization, as will be established in later chapters). 

 

 

The Kings of the North and South 

 

This same problem surfaces in most all of the land areas and peoples mentioned in the Word.  Moreover, it is patently clear that references to the King of the North and King of the South present real problems in understanding, as these references can also shift somewhat. 

 

Thus, the old kingdom of the North was mainly Syria (with a broader definition to include Asia Minor and Greece).  Today, it could well be Europe in general.  The kingdom of the South was historically Egypt.  Today, it could be an Arab or Moslem confederation, stretching from North Africa to Bangladesh and Indonesia. 

 

In attempting to define these two kingdoms, there is one complication with Turkey.  In the early 21st century, Turkey is making a move to become a part of United Europe (the King of the North).  Already, the EU has accepted Turkey as a candidate for membership (“Washington Times,” p. 25, of Dec 20-26, 1999, in an article by Andrew Borowiec on “Turkey’s entry into EU seen as having little effect on Cyprus”). 

 

Logically, it would also be easy to build a case that Turkey should ultimately unite with the King of the South, in view of her Moslem link to the other nations that will obviously make up this confederation.  Of course, Turkey could proceed in the next couple years with the pursuit of membership in EU, only to later switch to the Southern Moslem confederation. 

 

In any case, there seems to be an alliance of nations against Yisrael in the age end which includes the Edomites, as differentiated from the Amalekites (Ps 83:5-12).  Therefore, the exact status of Turkey in the kingdoms of the North and South will remain in question until perhaps very near the end (though she clearly will be an enemy of Yisrael, regardless of which direction she goes). 

 

 

The Language Link 

 

The point of these comments is that most of the old nations and kingdoms which inhabited the Middle East in Scriptural days are no longer there.  For the most part, they all moved on--sometimes voluntarily and sometimes by conquest.  As just noted, these futures came to not only the Yisrael nations, but also their neighbors as well. 

 

A previous chapter herein on blood types noted that many of the peoples using Latin in Europe were descendants of Ham.  Some clarification is needed on this to allow understanding. 

 

It appears that the ancient Babylonians were Hamitic peoples, in contrast to the Assyrians who were Shemites.  The modern Italians could be essentially descendants from these ancient Hamites (perhaps in the form of the Sabines, who may descend from Seba, son of Cush, and possible associates of the Chaldees--Job 1:15-17; Isa 45:14), but with a lot of miscegenation with other races and groups over the years. 

 

The modern peoples of the old Prussian empire (to be shortly elaborated upon) are likely descendants of the Assyrians--with a lot of miscegenation.  While Prussia is largely gone, its remnants and peoples still exist in parts of Germany, the Baltic states, Poland and White Russia. 

 

The Assyrians were one of the first big countries involved in the conquest of much of the Middle East.  It appears that the peoples conquered by Assyria were not only removed by them, but also adopted much of their language, culture and customs.  The same thing is true with the Babylonians and their conquests some 140 years later. 

 

Of course, the original Assyrian and Babylonian languages went through some transition and change as these peoples removed from their old Middle Eastern lands to new homes far away in the Northwest.  The result of this language change was to the eventual German and Latin languages (as elsewhere described herein).   

 

It seems fascinating but true that the peoples in Northern Europe, whose language is Germanic, can be traced to old Assyria and the Assyrian conquests of nations in the Middle East.  It is also true that the modern nations, whose language can be classified from Latin, developed from the peoples in the Babylonian conquests. 

 

The importance of this condition is that students of the Scriptures must understand that many or most of the nations and peoples mentioned in the Scriptures did not go away or vanish into the woodwork.  They survived for centuries. 

 

This makes study of the Word so incredibly fascinating when the student is able to begin to identify the various nations and peoples and understand their prophetic futures.  The essence is that Yeshayahu, Yirmeyahu, Yechezkel and the other OT prophets weren’t just filling up space by writing prophetic references to people existing only 3,000 years ago.  For sure, those words are for us today. 

 

 

The Four Kingdoms 

 

Hence, these realities are most interesting in terms of what all is globally happening here in the early 21st century.  Arab descendants of Ishmael living in the old land of Babylon (modern Iraq) actually could have some prophetic duality (although references to Babylon typically refer to an entirely different definition, as pointed out earlier herein). 

 

Anyway, it is interesting that Daniel’s four kingdoms and beasts, mentioned earlier, all seem to be surfacing here in the early 21st century in the context of the old land areas where those nations once existed.  Thus, Iraq links to Babylon and even Saddam Hussein thought that he was a restored Nebuchadnezzar. 

 

In 1988, Iraq struck a medallion with Saddam’s portrait on one side and Nebuchadnezzar’s likeness on the other side (Jun 1998 “New Beginnings,” p. 8).  The “Jerusalem Post” (of Feb 28, 1998) had a story identifying Saddam as a latter day Nebuchadnezzar. 

 

Iran certainly links to Persia and old Greece is still called Greece (although Syria and Turkey were a part of this old Grecian empire) and Russia is the Eastern leg of the old Roman Empire.  The Czar was merely a takeoff in the East on the former Roman Caesar--while the German Kaiser descended in the West from the Roman Caesar (in the two legs of the Roman Empire). 

 

It would appear that these four kingdoms (in the context of geographical land area definitions) will all surface as influencing powers in the Middle East area and as a prelude to the age end.  Thus, it is important to note the relevance of the daily media focus on Iraq and Iran and their opposition to the Jews in the state of Israel and to the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic allies of the Jews. 

 

 

Modern Babylon 

 

However, the student of the Word should be careful about concluding that this just noted fulfillment on the four horns is it. 

 

On the contrary, any number of references to Babylon or Babylonians in the Book can have absolutely nothing to do with modern Iraq at all.  In fact, this is usually the case, as noted above.  Such references often have application to the Babylonian religion, culture, economy or modern peoples and not to the old land area. 

 

Hence, the Babylonian religion is found in modern Christianity which is global and centered in Rome.  Next, the old Babylonian people are largely in modern Italy (but not so much so in Sicily and the Southern tip of the boot where Edomites from Zepho seem to live). 

 

The Babylonian capitals for gold and likely the money system are in London.  The Babylonian social, economic and commercial systems are all headquartered in New York City (along with some part of the money and financial powers).  And finally, the Babylonian culture and civilization are all over the Christian West, with a focus in Hollywood and New York City. 

 

This equating of Babylon to New York City brings up another fascinating point.  The Jan-Feb 2002 “Prophecy Flash” (p. 77) had a reader’s letter which noted a very intriguing linkage between the Babylon of old (in modern Iraq) with the new Babylon (in New York). 

 

This reader’s letter noted the presence of the Hebrew consonants of Yod, Resh and Kof in Iraq (Old Babylon).  Perhaps significantly, the same Hebrew consonants are found in York--Yod, Resh and Kof.  Thus, New York becomes New Babylon! 

 

 

The Horses 

 

There is another interesting four kingdoms surfacing when one looks at the four horses of the Revelation (Rev 6:1-8), which seem to have linkage to the horses of Zechariah 1:6-11 and 6:1-7.  These four horses appear to have duel features and particularly in the context of the four chariots with teams of horses linked with the four winds of heaven--red, black, white and dappled or bay at Zechariah 6:1-7. 

 

The black horses linking to the North probably represent the European power; the white horses in the West perhaps represent the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic empire of Britain and the US; the red horses in the East represent the Communist empire of Russia, China and Asia; and the bay or dappled horses in the South represent the Moslem empire of the Arabs and their Edomite and Keturah cousins. 

 

The pale color in the South comes from the Greek “choros,” meaning green, which links to chlorophyll (Jun-Jul 1998 “Prophecy Flash,” p. 15).  Reportedly, the color green identifies the Moslem nations since green is often a national color with many of them.  Green has implications as a Muslim religious color and is used on their mosques. 

 

 

Michael S. Coffman, Revisited 

 

While the above explanation seems to be the one being addressed by the Scriptural prophets, it should be noted that the previously quoted Michael S. Coffman also may have recognized them (in “The Birth of World Government,” p. 38-41) in his view of the power struggles underway with the four present world powers--Anglo (US and Britain), Socialist Europe (EU), Russia and China. 

 

Coffman does not link these four powers to the four chariots of Zechariah 6, per se, but his identification of them, and his remarks are especially interesting in the context of this writer’s interpretation, as outlined above.  Coffman seems to project a belief that the Russia and China powers are linking together to provide a recognizable presence of opposition to particularly the Anglo (US and Britain) power. 

 

In the coming military showdown with the US and White British Commonwealth, this writer anticipates an alliance of Russia, China, the Muslim world and other Third World nations against the Anglo power (as is described throughout this study at hand). 

 

Beyond the application of the four colored horses of Zechariah 6 to four great world empires, in the time approaching the age end, the horses could also have duality in their historic interpretations--white presenting Christianity, false Christs or peace; red covering war; black representing famine and food shortages; and bay, pale or dappled outlining diseases and pestilences. 

 

 

Modern Assyria 

 

Along with the importance of Babylon in the age end, there is also a significant presence of the just mentioned Assyria in the age end which is not to be found in the Middle East where Assyria once dwelt.  The historic Worldwide Church of God used to believe and teach that Assyria is modern Germany. 

 

This belief has some interesting support from Yair Davidy, who quoted a fascinating German tradition that the Assyrians had indeed settled portions of West Germany (“Lost Israelite Identity,” p. 252).  The report suggested that Trebeta, son of the Assyrian king Ninus, founded the city of Tier (1,300 years before Rome was founded-- “Deutschen Landen, Bihl 1953-69).  

 

In “The United States and British Empire Foretold in the Bible” (p. 78-79), writer Harold Hemenway quoted a number of ancient authorities which linked Germany to Assyria.  Hemenway quoted Jerome’s Letter 123 (ibid, p. 237), which named a number of peoples who had overrun Gaul.  Jerome added that Assur was joined in with them. 

 

Harold noted that medieval Arab authors said that the Assyrians are the same as the Germans.  Barhebraeus wrote that the Germanikah are a people in Mosel (Nineveh), who came from Persia (“Israelites and Hyksos,” p. 88-90).  Per Hemenway, Germany is Assyria in the Arab tradition. 

 

While the writer of this study at hand agrees with this German-Assyrian linkage, a point of qualification seems to be in order. 

 

The better view is that the old Prussians were undoubtedly Assyrians, as discussed above.  It is because of this likely connection that this writer also allows that the Russian invasion and conquest of the age ending House of Yisrael will be the great typical fulfillment of Assyria’s former conquest of Yisrael in the 8th century BCE. 

 

 

In Germany? 

 

Many Christian Identity people believe that the Germans are part of Yisrael.  However, as just noted, this writer holds that they are essentially Assyrians.  But historically, there were large blocs and numbers of Israelite peoples in Germany, as well as in France and other parts of Europe, as elsewhere discussed herein. 

 

As there was a regathering of Yisrael generally in the West, these Israelites, formerly in Germany and other portions of Europe, actually immigrated to the new House of Yisrael lands in Britain and America.  Most of this emigration out of Germany, France, Italy and other nearby states was predicated upon religious persecution. 

 

Surely, the Mennonites, Amish and numbers of emigrants from Germany involved racial Israelites.  The same is true with the Waldensians from Northern Italy and the Huguenots from France.  This option has been addressed in previous comments herein. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 522--Duality in the Age End II

 

 

Three Major Crises in Nature 

 

The Book seems to describe at least three major crises developing in the natural order in the framework of the age end.  These three separate events will cause enormous confusion among Christians, as will be outlined in remarks to follow. 

 

The first one seems to be the sixth seal involving a great earthquake, the sun being blackened, the moon becoming like blood, the stars of heaven falling from a mighty wind, the heavens departing as in a scroll roll, every mountain and island moved out of its place, and the fear of Yisrael’s leaders as they hide in caves and rocks of mountains (Rev 6:12-17). 

 

The second major crisis in nature involves the first five trumpets of the seventh seal (Rev 8:1-13; 9:1-12).  This includes hail and fire upon earth to destroy 1/3 of the vegetation and trees, a great mountain of fire into the ocean to destroy 1/3 of the ships and life therein, the wormwood star polluting 1/3 of the waterways, the darkening of the sun and moon, and the release of the host of Satan from the bottomless pit. 

 

The third major instance involves the formerly discussed seven last plagues or vials (Rev 16:1-21), as occurring about the time when YESHUA returns--actually in a possible 30 day block of time between YESHUA’s first descent to Bozrah to rescue the very elect (Isa 63:1-6; Rev 14:14-20) and the time that He returns to enter Jerusalem for His crowning and millennial rule (Zech 14:1-4; Rev 19:11-16). 

 

This series of plagues will be the real, final ones with the sores on men, the waters becoming blood or blood-like, the heating and cooling of the sun as it novas, the drying up of the Euphrates in preparation for the kings of the East to come to Palestine, and a great earthquake, as the earth seems to capsize (with new poles).  

 

 

The Problems in Interpretation 

 

The trouble in interpreting these events will arise because the world under Christian leadership will confuse these various phenomena; and of course, incorrectly interpret them in the context of ante-typical fulfillments. 

 

As an illustration of something which will be grossly confused, take the case of the prophecies associated with the great oceans.  First, there are prophecies about the oceans in the sixth seal (Rev 6:14), the second trumpet (Rev 8:8) and the second and seventh vials or plagues (Rev 16:3, 20). 

 

Plus, there are events taking place right now with the oceans which will not actually fulfill any of these four prophecies.  The following remarks will assess these various prophecies on the oceans in some detail and demonstrate the differences and how confusion will surface in Christendom over them. 

 

 

The Ante-Type of the Sixth Seal 

 

An amazing ante-typical fulfillment of the sixth seal seems to have just occurred or is building up to finish its occurrence soon--perhaps around 1999-2006, to be shortly described.  As outlined in former comments, the years 1999-2003 have already produced a series of events which look very much like the sixth seal.  These events will be described in detail in comments to follow. 

 

The only thing missing has been a big earthquake in the US--which could be very close to reality--along with darkened skies from volcanic eruptions.  Certainly, Seattle had a big, 6.8 quake on Feb 28, 2001 (which did $2 billion in damage, injured some 410 people and contributed to one death). 

 

Also, in connection with this ante-type of the sixth seal phenomenon, a strange thing started happening to raise a question about a possible fulfillment (in ante-type) of the islands being moved out of their places (which relate to the great oceans, just outlined above, as having enormous duality). 

 

Reports have surfaced indicating that some of the islands in the South Pacific (near Tonga) are sinking or moving in some manner (discussed on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM radio talk show on Dec 28, 1999).  In the context that some of these islands will soon be covered with water, plans are being made to evacuate their populations. 

 

Many of the islands in the Pacific are very close to sea level (i.e. Wake, the Marshalls, etc).  So it won’t take much movement to put them under water.  This condition on elevation also could offer a flooding of islands from melting ice (the so-called earth warming scenario).  But reportedly, this was not the problem noted in December 1999 on the sinking islands (although it could soon be a factor). 

 

There is also the prospect of something else happening by 2008, as a result of planetary movements or configurations (plus the impact of various meteorite showers in 1999-2003) and a surge in solar flares and sunspot activity (like in 2000-2003).  Any of these phenomena could cause a displacement in the mountains and islands of the sea (to flood some of them) and/or a great earthquake. 

 

The essence here is that there are at least several potential events which can lay the groundwork for the fulfillment of Revelation 6:14, either in an ante-type or typical fulfillment and especially, in terms of the oceans.  There are also the prospects of looking for the second trumpet (Rev 8:8-9) and the time of the second and seventh vials (Rev 16:3, 20), in connection with the oceans. 

 

Thus, the book of Revelation lays out several events in association with the oceans in the sixth seal, the trumpets and the plagues.  Surely, this can be confusing without proper study and understanding.  The point is that a number of separate events will impact upon the oceans in an ante-type and/or type fulfillment. 

 

 

The Real Sixth Seal 

 

While the ante-type of the sixth seal can come before the US and Canadian nations formerly end in the early summer of Yechezkel’s 33d year, the real type of the sixth seal seems to be dated about the time of this end. 

 

Otherwise, there seems to be some natural catastrophes also associated with this real sixth seal.  Some of these events can be repeats of some of the things which took place during the ante-type.  Surely, there will be an enormous US earthquake and probably another meteorite shower (beyond the Leonids of Nov 1999, 2000, 2001 and 2002).  For sure, the mountains and islands will move in the real fulfillment. 

 

These tragedies, at the fall of the US and Canada, do two things.  First, they will fulfill the sixth seal of Revelation.  And secondly, it appears that this fulfillment becomes the basis of another ante-type of future natural events to occur when the actual trumpets sound.  In other words, the accomplishment of the fulfillment of the sixth seal will be an ante-type of the first five trumpets.  Christians will confuse the two events. 

 

The Russian attack on the US and White British Commonwealth will pave the way for an attack by this same power on the Israeli state, as an ante-type of Ezekiel 38-39 (to be described, later herein).  The Russians and their Islamic allies will meet disaster in this motion--perhaps in the fall of Yechezkel’s 33d year. 

 

The Christian world will incorrectly look upon this invasion in Palestine as being Armageddon and the fulfillment of Ezekiel 38 and 39.  Any natural catastrophes then occurring or soon thereafter will become the fulfillments of the seven last plagues or vials in Christian eyes.  But all of this will only be ante-typical of what is to ultimately occur. 

 

With the ante-types of the trumpets out of the way (which come with the real sixth seal), the next thing on the horizon is the actual sounding of the first five trumpets, which probably occurs during the ministry of the true, final, two witnesses in Jerusalem (evidently during the last approximate part of the last seven years of this age). 

 

 

Actual Trumpets Involve Natural Events? 

 

Most of the actual trumpet fulfillments will probably involve natural events.  The great mountain of fire could be an asteroid impact on earth and meteorites and/or volcanic ash can account for some of the other presentations.  The only non-natural trumpet seems to be the fifth trumpet where Satan and his demonic host come forth out of their underwater imprisonment (the bottomless pit). 

 

The real two witnesses may produce these trumpets as judgments upon sinning men. Thus, this pair will be looked upon as the Beast and False Prophet of Revelation 13, as they preach truth to the world for 1,260 days to precede the start of the supposed millennium.  In accepting these occurrences as the very end, Christendom will then assume that Gee-Zeus has returned with the arrival of Satan

 

The third and final series of so-called or anticipated natural events seem to involve the seven last plagues, as elsewhere described herein.  When these things take place, it is all virtually over for the Beast man, the False Prophet and the misrule of Adam on Planet Earth. 

 

 

A Recap on Natural Events  

 

Some students of the book have chosen to interpret the first five seals of the book of Revelation in the context of YESHUA’s prophecy in Matthew 24.  Herbert Armstrong and his Worldwide Church of God was one group which offered this possibility. 

 

Thus, the four horsemen (white, red, black and pale) supposedly meant false “Christs,” war, famine and pestilence (as touched upon earlier) and the fifth seal represented tribulation over the ensuing 2,000-year history of Christianity.  This view was not of a single event of the occurrence of these things; but rather, the continuous and repetitive occurrence of them over the last 2,000 years. 

 

If this position had merit (and many Christians believe so today), then the next event is the sixth seal which involves a great earthquake, darkened sun, blood red moon, falling stars, a movement of the mountains and islands out of their place and the world’s leaders hiding in bunkers, dens and rocks. 

 

As outlined above and in former chapters, most all of these things have already taken place in 1999-2003 (but only in an ante-typical sense).  Any remaining features can happen quickly and especially so with any planetary alignments or in conjunction with sun spot activity or still something else.  It would not take much to cause a shift in the earth’s land mass and/or further satellite disruptions. 

 

Reportedly, the Russians have already been experimenting with man-made earthquakes.  As discussed formerly, earthquakes can be caused by detonating a nuclear device at a critical underground spot along a fault-line.  As the conflict builds up between the Russians, Islamics and others against the Anglo-Saxon-Celtic West, some man-made earthquakes could very easily surface. 

 

Man has seen many great earthquakes (with more occurring regularly); a great solar eclipse which darkened the sun on August 11, 1999; a blood red moon two or three times (notably on Jan 21 and Jul 16, 2000, with the eclipses); another solar and lunar eclipse combination during the winter of 2000-2001; falling stars during the Leonid showers in November 1999, 2000, 2001 and 2002; and a movement of some of the islands, as noted earlier (and possibly some mountains with the coming earthquakes). 

 

A possible ante-type of the leaders hiding themselves in bunkers, dens and rocks occurred during the turnover to 2000 (because of fear of Y2K), as described in a former chapter.  This all combined to give an appearance of the fulfillment of the sixth seal. 

 

 

Christian Confusion 

 

This writer can envision a condition evolving whereby many Christian leaders and sheep will take these or other events in 1999-2006 as the fulfillment of the sixth seal.  If so, the next thing they will look for are the trumpet messages (which are the backbone of the seventh seal).  But as just noted above, the events of 1999-2006 seem to be, in fact, only an ante-typical fulfillment of what is to come in the sixth seal. 

 

Frankly, the best estimate is that the real sixth seal takes place in Yechezkel’s 33d year, when the US and the rest of the White Anglo-Saxon-Celtic empire are destroyed nationally and the surviving people are enslaved (as outlined in Lev 26; Deut 28; and the book of Ezekiel). 

 

The North American continent is prepared anytime for a huge earthquake (the San Andreas or New Madrid faults or elsewhere).  Several volcanic mountains in the Western US are set to explode and spew ash over much of the US to blacken the sun and color the moon, perhaps by 2008.  Also, various meteor belts are already set to produce a shower of meteorites (falling stars), anytime from 2003 and on forward. 

 

As elsewhere noted, the real falling stars are likely symbolic of the fall of the House of Yisrael nations (when their national governments fall).  In connection with this event, there likely will be some natural phenomenons--plus the impact of a 30 days nuclear war upon the US, Canada and perhaps the rest of the White British Commonwealth (maybe, in Yechezkel’s 33d year). 

 

The coming nuclear war will force national leaders into underground bunkers.  A great earthquake, nuclear bombs and/or a crisis in the earth’s crust will cause the mountains and islands to move, ash from erupting volcanoes can darken the sun or cause a blood red moon and so forth. 

 

The incident of the leading men hiding in the dens and rocks of the earth suggests what would likely happen in nuclear war, when US leaders hide out in some of the underground cities now in existence in the Appalachian and Rocky Mountains.  These underground facilities were built as safety places for the elite in case of nuclear war (as described in former chapters). 

 

Consequently, the real events will happen, but likely in Yechezkel’s 33d year, instead of in the years of 1999-2008.  But many persons, especially Christians, will be unable to distinguish truth in the two presentations. 

 

 

More Christian Confusion 

 

These real events of the sixth seal in Yechezkel’s 33d year will confuse Christians, who will have thought that the sixth seal happened earlier in 2002-2008.  Therefore, Christians will look upon the real sixth seal in Yechezkel’s 33d year as being the first five trumpets.  The nuclear war will surely involve an explosion in a harbor (or harbors) which looks like a ball of fire in the ocean to destroy ships, people, etc. 

 

From that perspective, one or more nuclear explosions in the waters of US ports or harbors during the nuclear war on the US will apparently provide an ante-type of the second trumpet (in Yechezkel’s 33d year). 

 

This is especially likely when America’s enemies decide to strike the nuclear submarine bunkers and naval facilities in San Diego, Seattle and Charleston.  A nuclear bomb in ocean water will certainly be convincing as the fulfillment of Revelation 8:8.  But it will likely be only an ante-type of the second trumpet. 

 

Nuclear fallout, ash from exploding volcanoes, and a possible visiting asteroid can produce pollution and the death of vegetation, the Wormwood effect on the waters, and another darkening of the sun, moon and stars. 

 

It seems very likely that America and Canada will be faced with a real, live agriculture disaster in the context of a terrible locust (bug) invasion.  If this should come in Yechezkel’s 31st-32d years, paralleling the trouble on those two nations, some persons could be taken in to accept this invasion as being the 5th trumpet of Revelation.  But it will only be an ante-type of what is to come in the real fifth trumpet. 

 

So while Christians will look upon these events in Yechezkel’s 33d year as being the first five trumpets of Revelation 8 and 9; they will, in fact, be the real fulfillment of the sixth seal (Rev 6:12-17).  At best, they will only be ante-typical of what is to come in the five trumpets. 

 

 

The Real Trumpets 

 

Thereafter, the two final witnesses in Jerusalem will pronounce judgments upon the earth and upon sinning man (these judgments may occur off and on during the entire 1,260 days of work by the final two witnesses, only concluding when they are murdered by the Beast power in Yechezkel’s 37th year). 

 

These judgments will certainly include a gigantic drought, famine and pestilence outbreaks of the most gross kinds.  Thus, there will be astronomical and/or geological events on earth which will fulfill the trumpets of Revelation 8 and 9, starting perhaps in Yechezkel’s 33d-34th years. 

 

Likely, early in Yechezkel’s 34th year, Satan and his host of fallen angels come out of the bottomless pit.  And assuredly, in time, the Eastern army makes its beginning push West to murder and kill hundreds of millions or billions of people in the sense of the 5th and 6th trumpets. 

 

Christians will look upon these initial trumpet fulfillments, starting in Yechezkel’s 33d-34th years, as the final last seven plagues or vials, described in prior comments.  They will then be ready for the coming of their sweet Gee-Zeus.  Of course, Satan will accommodate them.  He will come as “Jesus Christ” and “God,” to sit in the Third Temple on Moriah in about Yechezkel’s 34th year. 

 

Therefore, what man faces is three or four ante-types of coming natural events which Christians will confuse and interpret as being the real events.  They will be fooled all the way through this age ending period up until the time when The Real YESHUA comes (in the fall of Yechezkel’s 37th year). 

 

 

Ezekiel 38 and 39 Duplicated 

 

One of the great classic duplications will occur with the earlier mentioned Ezekiel 38 and 39--which has never taken place in history, as of this date in the early 21st century. 

 

The true, final Ezekiel 38 and 39 comes late--possibly in Yechezkel’s 40th-41st years from the invasion of the kings of the East and their assemblage at Armageddon, in preparation for an assault on Jerusalem, long “after” YESHUA and the elect secure the city (Rev 20:7-8). 

 

But some years earlier (likely in Yechezkel’s 33d year), the world will see an ante-typical fulfillment of Ezekiel 38 and 39--when the previously outlined Russian and Islamic alliance invades the modern state of Israel in Palestine--just about or following the time that they and/or the UN act to crush and destroy the modern House of Yisrael nations (as briefly noted above). 

 

Of course, this whole exercise will fool many people.  Certainly, Christian Identity people and many others will think that Ezekiel 38-39 is taking place when the Russians and their allies strike the US.  These fooled persons will keep looking for The MESSIAH to come and rescue them, America and the White British Commonwealth nations.  But He will not come then.  Christian Identity types will be greatly surprised. 

 

 

More on the Ezekiel 38 and 39 Ante-Type 

 

The House of Yisrael nations will go down the tubes.  The attack and defeat of the House of Yisrael nations (America and the White British Commonwealth) will not be the fulfillment of Ezekiel 38-39, nor will it even be the ante-typical fulfillment, which correctly comes later in Palestine when Russia and her allies move against the Jewish state (yes, Ezekiel 38 and 39 address Palestine and not the US). 

 

So the Jews in about Yechezkel’s 33d year won’t have the US for protection.  But they won’t need America because they will be rescued by YHWH.  The Russian and Islamic armies invading Palestine will be crushed by The ELOHIM, in what will appear to be a fulfillment of Ezekiel 38 and 39. 

 

Many persons reading the Scriptures (particularly surviving Christian Israelites) will come to believe that this ante-typical (Russian) fulfillment of Ezekiel 38 and 39 is the real thing; rather than just a sample or example of the future reality (which happens later, after YESHUA returns). 

 

Of course, it will be this false belief which will help condition the world’s population to accept the coming Satan in Yechezkel’s 34th year as “Jesus Christ and God.”

 

In an article on “A Jew Speaks Out” in the October 1995 “New Beginnings” (p.12), Bernard L. Bateson sees the present influx of Jews into Palestine as a gathering of representatives of a section of the House of Yehudah (but not the prophetic rebuilding of Zion) in preparation for the fulfillment of the “Russian Chapters of Ezekiel” (38 and 39). 

 

In “What Price Israel” (p. 148), Alfred Lilienthal, quoted earlier, mentions the strategic importance of the Middle East and the fact that Moscow has long held an interest in it with a view of its eventual “conquest.”  Once effective American protection of Israel is removed, Moscow and her Islamic allies can move. 

 

The writer of this present study agrees with both Lilienthal and Bateson.  This present Jewish influx has been only of a remnant of the House of Yehudah (plus a lot of Amalek-Edomites--truly a mixture of wheat and tares) in preparation for an ante-typical fulfillment of Ezekiel 38 and 39. 

 

However, the real return of Yisrael and the typical accomplishment of Ezekiel 38 and 39 (and Revelation 20:8) may not occur until perhaps seven-ten years later.  The ante-typical fulfillment of Ezekiel 38 and 39 will be one of the great events which will totally mislead and fool Christians in the age end. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 523--Duality in the Age End III

 

 

YHWH’s Age Ending Witnesses, Revisited 

 

With the duality outlined in the former chapters, the Word clearly describes the work of certainly the real two witnesses in the age end, as described earlier.  This will be a good work of righteousness, as these two witnesses evidently restore the Temple, true worship and preach truth to the world for 1,260 days (Zech 4; Mal 3; Rev 11). 

 

With all of the duality, as outlined so far, what about the two real witnesses?  If the world perceives this pair as the Beast and False Prophet, what can the public look for in the way of a fulfillment of the two witnesses.  After all, some Christians are aware of the prophecies in Malachi and Revelation regarding the two witnesses.  These prophecies have to have a fulfillment, if the world is to accept Satan as Gee-Zeus. 

 

Logically, there will be a ante-type of fulfillment of the work of the true two witnesses that will go on to fool the world and make people believe that the ante-type was the final fulfillment, as discussed above and in previous chapters.  This writer has long believed that this ante-type will be in the form of the first two prophets that may be types of Yirmeyahu and Yechezkel. 

 

In a sense, this first pair of prophets (if they do materialize, as is highly possible) will proceed the real final two witnesses by some days, weeks or months, or perhaps even years.  There will possibly be several primary differences between these two pairs of men.  The first pair will concentrate upon the House of Yisrael and the second pair will focus upon a witness to the world. 

 

To further complicate matters, there will be a pair of important Jewish leaders in Jerusalem, working to restore the Temple and true worship (this pair may be a civil governor and a religious high priest).  Surely, these Jewish leaders are on the scene in 2003 and could be heavily influenced in person by or via mental telepathy from the final two witnesses, wherever they are at that point of time. 

 

Ultimately, there are to be four carpenters, evidently in Jerusalem, involved in restoring true worship, as noted earlier (Zech 1:20-21).  While the real final two witnesses seem for sure to be a part of these four carpenters, one must wonder about who or which persons make up the balance of the foursome. 

 

Of course, the two fleshly Jewish leaders could be involved, as is implied in Zekharyah in the ante-type. 

 

Alternatively, the four carpenters could include the first two prophets and the final two witnesses mentioned above and in earlier chapters.  At the moment, this writer leans in the direction that the four carpenters are the first pair of prophets (Yirmeyahu and Yechezkel) and the final two witnesses (Eliyahu and Yohanan), but would not argue the point either way. 

 

 

More on the Carpenters 

 

In trying to date the possible four (or possibly six?) carpenters, former presentations herein have laid out the possibilities.  Likely, the two fleshly Jewish leaders are already on stage in Jerusalem by 2003 or soon thereafter. 

 

Next, the case can be built that the first pair of prophets (Yechezkel and Yirmeyahu), if they are to surface, will start their work around the 12th day of the fourth month of Yechezkel’s 30th year.  The Yechezkel prophecies may start first in Yechezkel’s 30th year in Jerusalem or in the House of Yisrael lands. 

 

The final two witnesses will publicly surface on the global scene when it is time for their 1,260 days ministry to the world (in the last heptad). 

 

This writer believes that the two witnesses may have a behind the scenes, non-public work, in the first half of the last heptad (starting about the time that religious Jews are either preparing the site for the Third Temple or making plans for the rebuilding of the Temple in Yechezkel’s 29th-31st years).  Thus, the case can be made that these two final witnesses will have a role to play in this course of events. 

 

If some of their work does surface in the first half of the last heptad, it likely will commence by Yechezkel’s 30th year (although it could start in the 29h year and possibly even in the 31st year).  If their public work starts for the last half of the heptad (as is possible), it should be revealed publicly before the first month of Yechezkel’s 34th year. 

 

 

More 

 

In any case, some preliminary work in Jerusalem sets the stage for the arrival of the real, final two witnesses, who do their public work over 1,260 days of time preceding the arrival of YESHUA in Yechezkel’s 37th year.  These two men will likely be Eliyahu and Yohanan, as discussed above and earlier. 

 

The very presence of Malakhi’s words leads one to believe that Eliyahu might have a key role in the restoration of true worship in the first part of the last seven years (which would validate his ministry in the first half of the heptad).  Of course, it could be done by mental telepathy, in the first half of the last heptad, if his public ministry covers the last half. 

 

Thus, during the first part of the last seven-year set-off, maybe there will be four carpenters/men, who will be contemporary fleshly people.  Or alternatively, they may do some part of their work by mental telepathy.

 

 

More on Yohanan 

 

Just like Eliyahu would possibly have a preliminary role in the building of the Temple and the restoration of true worship in the first half of the last seven years, the case can be made that Yohanan might also have a role in the first half.  Certainly, the possibility that Eliyahu and Yohanan are involved with two, preliminary, Jewish leaders has much merit. 

 

In the case of Yohanan, he will also likely be associated with the restoration of true, Messianic worship and the dispensing of the Baptism of The RUACH HA KODESH--with the developing Philadelphia congregation. 

 

However, he may dispense the baptism as the latter rain--just before Philadelphia departs Jerusalem for Petra at the start of the last 1,260 days (as elsewhere discussed herein--Isa 4:4; Jer 5:24; Hos 6:3; Joel 2:23-29; Zech 9:1-12; 10:1; Acts 2:17-18; Jas 5:7). 

 

With this baptism, he probably will be just starting his 1,260 days of testimony in the flesh to precede the return of YESHUA (along with Eliyahu). 

 

 

Still Two More 

 

Beyond these four to six possible workers in the age end, there remains two more “possible” witnesses, who will evidently not be directly involved in the drama on earth.  Enoch was first, because he was taken--evidently translated without seeing death (Gen 5:24; Heb 11:5).  Perhaps Enoch has been a witness in heaven for 5,300 years and particularly since he did not see death. 

 

There is one more “possible” heavenly observer who could substantiate Enoch’s work.  This one is Moshe. The Torah seems to say that he died and evidently was buried somewhere (possibly on Mount Nebo) by YHWH (Deut 34:5-7). 

 

Some Jewish tradition has persisted for ages that he was taken to heaven (possibly restored to life and not buried by YAH, but taken to heaven to become a heavenly witness along with Enoch--see Matt 16:14; 17:3-4). 

 

 

John 3:13 

 

Mentioning Enoch, Moshe, Eliyahu, the Apostle Yohanan and persons in the Passover and Pentecost resurrections, in the context that they were taken to heaven, creates a need to look at John 3:13--which seems to suggest that no man had ever went to heaven. 

 

In the case of Yohanan, himself, and the people in the Passover and Pentecost harvests, the point is mute because this reference was clearly written “before” they were perhaps removed at a later date.  

 

But for Enoch (who was translated), Eliyahu (who apparently went up in the flesh with a destiny to return in the flesh) and possibly Moshe, the question is more complex since they would have been removed to heaven before Yohanan wrote those words.  So some explanation is needed.  First, this remark clearly ties in part to Deuteronomy 30:12 and Proverbs 30:4. 

 

In the case of the Torah, the remark suggests that one doesn’t have to go to heaven and get explanations for the laws cited and return with them to earth for the Israelites to hear the truth (Deut 30:12).  As Moshe had just noted, YAH’s laws are not complicated or far off (although Eliyahu will seemingly fulfill this text to the letter in his ascent and later descent). 

 

Shlomo’s words asked who has ascended to heaven “and” descended (Prov 30:4).  The KJV does not properly translate this with the word “or,” which in the Hebrew should be translated as “and” --as the “Soncino Books of the Bible” outline (Proverbs, p. 201). 

 

If Enoch (or Moshe or Eliyahu later) did ascend to heaven when he was translated, then he obviously had not descended when Shlomo wrote his remarks.  Hence, this text is consistent with presentations in this study. 

 

In the case of John 3:13, the quotation certainly doesn’t quote the Tanakh references correctly (in the Masoretic or Septuagint presentations, which are similar on this topic)--since it does not make the point of a descent.  But there are other problems with this verse, as various scholars outline. 

 

For example, B. F. Westcott says that the words “which is in heaven” are not in ancient Greek manuscripts and appear to be a later added “gloss” (“The Gospel According to John,” p. 53).  Moreover, instead of saying “no man,” the actual Greek reads “no one” (“The Emphatic Diaglott,” p. 321). 

 

Obviously, this “no one” reference creates real problems for verity because YHWH, Himself, and a number of heavenly messengers have both descended and ascended from heaven to earth (i.e. Gen 18:1; 19:1; I Kg 22:22-23). 

 

 

More Explanations 

 

So it cannot be correct to say that “no one” had ever ascended to heaven.  One YHWH and one or more messengers had “ascended” many times historically.  Clearly, something is wrong with this text as it reads. 

 

Furthermore, different translations render this verse differently which also goes on to create more confusion.  For instance, “The Living Bible” (p. 839) gives it as “For only I, the Messiah, have come to earth and will return to heaven.” 

 

Certainly, the gist of this text concerns the descent and ascent (as opposed to an ascent and descent) of The MESSIAH.  All translations and commentaries seem to agree on this interpretation. 

 

“The Expositor’s Greek Testament” (v. 1, p. 715) notes that the Jews involved had not believed earthly things, so much less would they believe heavenly things, but there is none to testify of them save only that One who came down from heaven. 

 

Henry Alford’s “The Greek Testament” (v. 1, p. 716-717) is dogmatic in saying that it was the Word, made flesh, Who had “came down from heaven” and would later ascend to heaven and Who can speak of the new birth. 

 

Shaul also connected when he asked who should ascend to bring The MESSIAH down from heaven or who would descend to bring Him up from the grave (Rom 10:6-8). 

 

It would seem that truly Yohanan’s remarks do allow that The MESSIAH descended (Prov 30:4) in order to reveal heavenly truths (Deut 30:12) and would later ascend.  In short, John 3:13 must be interpreted in the context of what the Tanakh outlines and even then there is some confusion in the Greek NT presentation. 

 

As a minimum, one would be hard pressed to argue with the Tanakh’s words and try to read something into Yohanan’s text which contradict or confuse the OT.  It’s just highly possible that the NT text was altered (mistakenly or on purpose) by early Catholic copyists, as allowed by B. F. Westcott and as suggested in a prior chapter herein. 

 

 

The Golden or East Gate, Revisited

 

The modern city of Old Jerusalem has eight gates.  In Scriptural times, there were at least twelve which included the famous East Gate (Neh 3:29), leading directly into the Temple’s front entrance in the Temple Mount area.  The Arabs named this East Gate “Bab ed--Dahariye” or the Gate of Eternal Life.  The Jews call it “Shaar-ha Rehamim” or the Gate of Mercy.  In Second Temple days, it was called the Beautiful Gate. 

 

To Christians, it is known as the Golden Gate.  According to the previously quoted Gershon Salomon, the Golden Gate (which was once built in gold) was also called the Shushan Gate because the Jews in Shushan donated the money to build it, apparently in Second Temple days (“The Voice of the Temple Mount Faithful,” p. 47). 

 

But as discussed in a prior chapter, Salomon suggests that the East, Golden or Shushan Gate is a different gate than the Mercy Gate which is now visible in the Eastern Wall (ibid, p. 47). 

 

As cited earlier, Salomon believes that the actual East Gate was a little South of the present visible gate--which is actually the Mercy Gate.  Since Salomon’s words were based on a theory about a finding by the Muslims in their work under the Temple Mount, it has to be held in suspect.  At the moment, this writer leans in the direction that the presently visible gate is the Golden Gate. 

 

This present East Gate and some or all of the other Temple Mount gates were likely built in the early 7th or 16th centuries CE by Moslem conquerors--although there is some tradition that the Byzantines built the East Gate--just before the Arabs conquered the city of Jerusalem.  In any case, the Arab Muslims either built it or took possession of it, almost at once after it was built.    

 

Once built and/or taking possession of the gate, the Muslims did a strange thing.  They bricked up the East Gate entrance to close it (as it is visibly closed currently on the Eastern wall today). 

 

The “why” for this act is most intriguing.  It starts with the fact that this gate was built directly over earlier East Gate constructions (actually back to Shlomo’s times).  Archaeological digs just inside the wall and in front of the gate display some of the earlier constructions. 

 

As noted in a former chapter--in Second Temple days, the East Gate connected to a beautiful and spectacular two tiered bridge which ran across the Kidron Valley to the opposite Mount of Olives.  From the Mount of Olives, the descent and ascent to the East Gate is fairly significant.  So, with this bridge, it was much easier to walk from the Mount of Olives directly into the Temple on a reasonably level plane. 

 

 

Some Significance 

 

Likely YESHUA came through the East Gate, just before Passover and His coming trial in 30 CE (Zech 9:9; Matt 21:1-14).  He assuredly crossed it when He was brought into Jerusalem to die.  Thus, the Word said that the glory of The EL would enter the East Gate (Ezek 43:1-4) and the gate would be shut and be opened no more until a future Prince came to enter it (Ezek 44:1-3). 

 

According to a Jewish tradition, “The Divine Presence first departed through this gate and by the same gate, the divine Presence will return.”  In 1641, David the Karaite said:  The sealed East Gate “will not be opened until the eyes of Israel shall be opened in the future redemption.”  Now, the reason for the strange actions of the Muslims becomes clear. 

 

After building the gate (or soon taking possession of it), the Muslims remembered or came to know that the Prophet Eliyahu would actually lead The Coming Jewish MESSIAH into Jerusalem (from the Mount of Olives) through the Eastern Golden Gate.  In desperation, the Muslims completely sealed the gate up and put a Moslem cemetery in front of it, hoping that Eliyahu, being a priest, would not cross it. 

 

Presently, there are no exterior roads directly to the Golden Gate.  Even the prospect of walking up to it is limited with the cemetery there and because of a large olive grove that occupies the adjacent Kidron Valley.  When this writer was in Jerusalem in 1975, this grove was totally fenced in and guarded by dogs.  However, the East Gate will be opened in the age end.  So the present obstacles will be removed or nullified. 

 

 

Colin Deal 

 

In a possible duality, writer Colin Deal assessed it in his May-June 1983 “End Time News.”  Deal noted the earlier East Gate constructions and asked if the top gate could be opened in the tribulation period for the so-called Antichrist and the lower, covered gate be opened later for The Real MESSIAH. 

 

This outline by Deal could have some genuine merit.  It is indeed plausible that the currently sealed Eastern Gate will open up to admit Satan when he enters Jerusalem as Gee-Zeus and Gawd to sit in a Third Temple.  Perhaps when the real YHWH YESHUA returns some 1,290 days or so later, an earthquake will open the real East Gate, now largely buried under rubble. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 524--Duality in the Age End IV

 

 

Three Tribulations, Revisited 

 

A former chapter discussed at some length the Scriptural and historical evidence to support the idea of the coming of three great tribulations--with a primary focus in all three efforts upon Christians, at least fundamentalist Christians with some desire or appreciation for truth and righteousness. 

 

Without attempting to repeat those former comments, the point must be made here that the unraveling of those three tribulations will spell out a great presentation of the incredible repeating of prophecy. 

 

In the first instance, we surely face enormous persecution upon the Christian right-wing and particularly in the Christian Identity movement.  This writer is convinced that with the fall of the United States and the other House of Yisrael nations, Protestant Christianity will face a coming great tribulation (the real fifth seal of the book of Revelation). 

 

Finally, when Satan and the Beast power enters Jerusalem and takes over, the prophesied great tribulation commences upon all of so-called humanity.  While many persons will easily succumb to this trial, others (like some Christians) might actually resist and suffer greatly from the persecution and trouble. 

 

For sure, the evidence is in place that three tribulations will soon be upon collective man.  The future assuredly promises days of great trouble and hurt. 

 

 

More Ante-Types 

 

When the Russian Bear (Dan 7:5; 11:5-19) and some of its allies begin their subsequent attack on the state of Israel in Palestine, their army will be miraculously destroyed by YHWH (in about Yechezkel’s 33d year).  The world will incorrectly see this as Ezekiel 38 and 39, in association with the so-called battle or assembly at Armageddon. 

 

With the Russian bear (with the three ribs in its teeth) and its allies out of the way, the leopard power (yellow, with black spots) is ready to assume the stage.  Quickly, four wings or segments of Asia (possibly China, Japan, Korea and Malaysia, Indo-China, Pakistan, etc) and likely Africa arise as the next formidable world power (the leopard of Dan 7:6). 

 

Also, these four wings could have some other definition like political or racial groups, involving Asia essentially, with some inclusion of the Middle Eastern Muslims, India or Black Africa, which would justify and validate the black spots on the leopard (as Coy Weaver of North Georgia pointed out to me many years ago). 

 

Already, in the early 21st century, China is making serious moves in wooing the Colored peoples in Latin America, Asia, and Africa.  The Chinese take over of the Panama Canal is discussed elsewhere herein.  Several so-called peace treaties have been negotiated by China with various Colored nations (like the one signed by China and Zimbabwe on Aug 13, 2002, as announced on NPR radio that day). 

 

The Aug 16, 2002, “The Week” (p. 7) had a news item that the Israelis had canceled an exhibition on Albert Einstein’s life which was scheduled to open in Beijing because the Chinese insisted that all references be removed which mention that Einstein was Jewish (to appease the Muslim world).  The Israelis were upset and canceled out.  Recently, the Israeli-Chinese friendship efforts have faltered. 

 

The threat of this combined Asian and African power prompts Europe to immediately complete unification and become the primary power bloc within the existing United Nations (Dan 7:7; Rev 13:1-5).  All of the world will become a part of this configuration, although the Asians and Moslems (of the King of the South) will be somewhat independent and ready to break away at a given point in time (Dan 11:44). 

 

This last UN alliance will arise sometime between six years before the end and three and one half years before the end.  As this configuration develops, the persecution of Protestant Christians in the old Anglo-Saxon-Celtic nations will subside.  Probably, most of these surviving Anglo-Saxon-Celtic peoples will be slaves in various parts of the world by this time. 

 

 

More 

 

But in any case, the Christian ecumenical movement, coupled with the ante-typical tribulation, will have succeeded in bringing all the world’s religions (including Protestant Christianity) back to Rome and acceptance of the Pope as the world’s pastor. 

 

By the time of 3 1/2 years before the end, the Beast will be ready to conquer Jerusalem and commence the great tribulation against those obeying YAH’s commandments and having the faith of YESHUA (in the rest of the election).  

 

While the great tribulation, per se, will apparently only last about three and a half years, it will likely cover the primary period of punishment upon the House of Yisrael in the form of Yakov’s Trouble, which will actually cover some seven years.  In other words, the House of Yisrael will face seven years of great trouble. 

 

And of this seven years, about one-half of it will be in the form of the great tribulation which will involve religion and worship issues.  It appears that Yakov’s Trouble will cover several problems and difficulties for Yisrael (like a serious drought, famine and war in the land) that are not a part of the great tribulation. 

 

 

An Interesting Parallel With the Jews 

 

In 1938, the Amalekite Adolf Schicklgruber and his Nazi followers launched his intense persecution and terror on European Jews (to include both evil, Amalekite Jews and good, Israelite Jews).  This time of terror was to ultimately last seven years (when it ended in 1945 with the military defeat of Germany and the suicide of Schicklgruber). 

 

The world has come to know this tragedy as the “Holocaust.”  However, it more correctly was an ante-type of the seven years of Yakov’s Trouble, coming upon the House of Yisrael in the age end.  Thus, it effectively was Yakov’s Trouble for the Jews (which included true, Israelite Jews). 

 

The horror of being identified, arrested, murdered, imprisoned in concentration camps and so forth became the lot for European Jews.  The only way out was to “flee” before being captured or taken into state custody.  Many Jews abandoned their property, their lives, their homes and fled in panic and terror.  Of course, many ultimately came to Britain and the US (which were sanctuaries of sorts). 

 

Here, in the age end (evidently, in Yechezkel’s 30th year), the real Yakov’s Trouble (a type of the WWII Holocaust) will start and intensify as it strikes the House of Yisrael and her peoples.  It will last approximately seven years.  Everything that was horrible, evil, sorrowful, terrible and bad under the Holocaust will happen to the House of Yisrael (plus a lot more, as it will be even worse--if that is possible). 

 

Israelites will have to give up everything they own and flee to avoid being identified, arrested, murdered and imprisoned in slave labor camps.  This will be hard for many persons to do just as it was tough on the Jews from 1938 to 1945.  But there will be no other way for survival beyond fleeing in panic and terror, as the sword approaches. 

 

Just like America and Britain were havens of safety for innocent Jews, fleeing the evil Schicklgruber, the modern, Jewish state of Israel in Palestine will be a haven of safety for fleeing White Anglo-Saxon-Celtic Israelites (most of whom will be Protestant Christians).  So what happened with the Jews in 1938-1945 will soon happen to the House of Yisrael Israelites--also for seven years. 

 

 

So-Called Christian Rapture 

 

Realizing that the Word foretells some great times of trouble coming upon earth in the age end (this truth cannot be missed by anyone who reads the Book at all since it is so unmistakably clear), some Christians have tried to find an escape hatch that will allow them to miss all of this coming trouble.  To accomplish this end, much of Protestant Christendom has turned to the “rapture” theory. 

 

Believing in an immortal soul which goes to heaven (the supposed destiny of good Christians) or hell at death (discussed earlier), it was not hard for Protestants to cook up a pre-tribulation rapture which would deliver them from all of the coming trouble and particularly the great tribulation (where Satan vents his wrath upon man). 

 

The idea of a glorious rapture was unknown in Christian theology until the year 1830, when a young woman named Margaret Macdonald, living in Port Glasgow, Scotland, had some revelations that a select group of Christians would be caught up to meet their “Christ” in the air before the days of “Antichrist” (per Dave MacPherson in “The Unbelievable Pre-Trib Origin”). 

 

It’s hard to say what motivated Margaret to have these “revelations.”  But they came to her around the time that the second advent movement began unfolding and when numbers of Christian people began starting to set dates for the end of the age and the return of their hoped for “Christ.”  This expectation perhaps influenced her to some extent. 

 

The well known John Darby of the Brethren picked up on it and wrote about Margaret’s ideas in a Christian publication called “the Morning Watch” from Plymouth, England in September 1830.  But this “new doctrine,” as some called it, never really took hold beyond its limited acceptance in England and Scotland. 

 

Then, in 1909, Dr C. I. Scofield accepted the belief and popularized it in his “Scofield Reference Bible.”  In “A Companion to the New Scofield Reference Bible,” E. Schuyler English elaborated on the theory and quoted a few Scriptures which supposedly supported it (Matt 24:41-42; John 14:3; I Cor 15:51-57; I Thes 4:13-17; II Thes 2:1). 

 

Importantly, none of the references cited by Scofield/Schuyler seem to allow for a rapture, as the proponents have advocated and suggested. 

 

 

I Thessalonians 4:13-17 

 

The only Scripture mentioned by Scofield/Schuyler, which deserves any comment, is I Thessalonians 4:13-17--where the dead elect and those elect still alive are caught up to meet the coming YESHUA in the air, obviously for them to go to the Sea of Glass or as He is returning for His millennial reign (with them on earth).  The resurrection of the elect dead must occur here.  YESHUA’s phase I and II returns were discussed earlier. 

 

But both of these events occur “after” the tribulation and not “before” it.  The Word does suggest physical safety for the very elect of Philadelphia (as was described in prior chapters) on earth during the tribulation (Rev 3:9-10; 12:6).  But this is no Christian rapture to heaven. 

 

Clearly, at YESHUA’s first return to Bozrah, the firstfruits’ harvest of Sukkot (those still alive or possibly the whole 144,000, plus a probable like number of women) arise to meet YESHUA and to be taken to the Sea of Glass (Rev 15:2) to escape YHWH’s wrath on man during the seven last plagues. 

 

But this Sea of Glass safety (whatever and wherever it will be) is certainly no rapture to escape the great tribulation.  Manifestly, the reference to it is to persons who have went through the great tribulation (except for Philadelphia) and did not accept the mark of the beast. 

 

Frankly, it would seem that Shaul’s reference to being caught up in the air (I Thes 4:13-17) does refer to this Sea of Glass event, if not to YESHUA’s final, ultimate return.  But whichever application, there clearly is no basis or support for the rapture theory, as enunciated by poor Margaret in her trance and evident demonic revelations. 

 

Tragically, many Christians believing in this rapture theory nonsense actually suppose that when they are raptured off to heaven, they will stay there for infinity (to float around on clouds forever?).  However, some Christians perceive that, in fact, YESHUA rules on earth during the millennium. 

 

This realization has prompted several of them to suppose that some seven years or so after the rapture, they will return to earth to be with YESHUA for the millennium (per Anthony Buzzard in an article on “The Rapture--When?” in the Jun-Jul 1997 “Restitution Herald,” p. 15). 

 

 

Another Illustration of Duality 

 

Another possible example can easily arise over Yohanan’s words about the two horned beast causing so-called miracles and wonders--which admittedly, carnal people look for and appreciate.  An A.S.K. Prophetic Report, on the “Place of Safety” (p. 6) by the former Dr Ernest L, Martin of Portland, Oregon (now deceased), has some interesting comments on this issue. 

 

Martin believed in a faked Second Advent, but then went on to say that angels of Satan will appear on earth posing as departed loved ones or other prominent individuals who had died beforehand (duplicating what happened with the familiar spirit which came to Shaul masquerading as the dead Shmuel--I Sam 28:11, 14). 

 

In this environment, people on earth will be taken in by these demons and will be led to believe that they are humans “resurrected” from the dead.  Religious people will quickly accept the premise that the millennium has started and the resurrection of the dead is in progress.  This writer would just add that Christians indeed would buy into this subterfuge, as well as other peoples. 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chapter 525--Duality in the Age End V

 

 

The Final Deception 

 

After accepting Satan as Gee-Zeus for much or all of the 3 1/2 years of the great tribulation, the ecumenical Christian world will be elated with their false beliefs that the 1,000-year millennium has started.  They will be unprepared for the real YHWH YESHUA and will not be in any mood to accept Him when He does come. 

 

As noted in other comments herein, Satan, the false prophet (the Pope) and the ruling Beast government will motivate and hype up the population to look upon the coming YESHUA and His messengers and the election as an alien invasion of some sort.  All of the world’s governments will mobilize to fight YESHUA and this seems to be the basis for the armies to begin gathering at Armageddon. 

 

Incidentally, numbers of perceptive individuals have anticipated an invasion of alien beings.  This has prompted any number of movies like Star Wars, Moonraker, Close Encounters of the Third Kind, Independence Day, The Arrival, Men in Black and on an on. 

 

There is another fallout of this present hype about aliens and UFOs.  In his video on “Shackles of the New World Order” (which was assessed in some detail in preceding chapters), Dr Rod Lewis reflects on the possibility that there is a desire among some of the shakers and movers of the new world order to discredit and impugn Scriptural fundamentalism. 

 

 

Space Warfare 

 

At West Point in 1955, General of the Army Douglas MacArthur told the cadets that the next war would be an inter-planetary war and that the nations needed to make a common front against an attack from people from another planet (Winter 1997 “Compass,” p. 21, in an article on “Biblical UFOs and the Coming Deception”). 

 

MacArthur’s prediction is coming true in the late 20th and early 21st centuries, as was proven in a Nov 8, 1999, “US News & World Report” story (p. 30-33) by Richard J. Newman on “The New Space Race.”  The report focused upon US efforts to prepare for a war in the heavens.  Specifically, a new breed of satellites is turning the heavens into the battlefield of the future. 

 

To meet this anticipated future, the US has already organized the US Space Command, with headquarters in Colorado Springs, CO, which will be responsible for “countering...space systems and services used for hostile purposes.”  General Richard Myers, then head of the Command (and now Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff), said that “There’s a new proliferation (of space-based capabilities).” 

 

Currently, the Pentagon is working on ways to defend its satellites from attack and to keep other nations from using space to their advantage.  Future plans include satellite defense systems and in time the capability to conduct aggressive space warfare by attacking targets in orbit, in the air (in the heavens) or on the earth’s surface. 

 

 

The Mars Connection, Revisited   

 

The just mentioned Dr Rod Lewis allows that there is a conscious effort to try to establish that there was once a humanoid civilization and culture on the planet Mars and that from there, so-called human beings came to earth to populate it in the distant past.  He suggests that the 1997 news reports about evidence of a fossil in a Mars meteor found on Antarctica could be the start of a campaign to make this connection. 

 

A “New York Times” report of Mar 15, 1999, said that NASA hopes to find evidence of life on Mars by 2008 (Mar 15, 1999, “Spokesman-Review”).  News reports in June 2000 suggested that some scientists now claim that photographs from Mars show some evidence that water once was on the planet. 

 

Other recent news efforts allege that Mars has the remains of possible pyramids and a mountain of one-half of a human face--that resemble the pyramids and sphinx of ancient Egypt (there are also allegations of man-made structures on the moon). 

 

With all this media interest, former President Slick Clinton announced his desire to see further Mars explorations (which have been rarely discussed in the past).  Perhaps some of the cloud of secrecy surrounding Mars was then in the process of being lifted. 

 

However, the prevailing problems with Mars returned in 1999 when a couple of important and very expensive Mars space efforts failed.  These failures and a possible explanation for them were addressed in a former chapter.  In any case, the failures fueled new speculations about Mars. 

 

 

Reaching Into the Heavens 

 

When the evil Beast man Nimrod took over in the Adamic civilization (Gen 10:8-10), just after the flood, he and/or his colleagues and associates prevailed upon the dumb Adamites (and their behemah slaves or helpers) to build a city and a tower to reach unto the heavens so that they could make a name for themselves--of fame (“Soncino Chumash,” p. 52) for obvious pride purposes (Gen 11:4). 

 

Of course, this whole stupid effort displeased The MOST HIGH.  So the worst of their fears came to pass.  They were scattered abroad and their one language was confused (evidently into 70 varieties).  Their efforts to reach unto the heavens failed (or certainly were suspended for the time being). 

 

But few people seem to realize that Moshe was a prophet.  His words in Genesis 11:4 were incredibly prophetic of what was to come upon the world scene here in the age end.  Actually, the events described by him were an ante-type of what has been happening in the form of the type since the 1960s. 

 

Adamic men and their behemah and chaiyah helpers have been concerned about their fame and glory (for pride purposes).  They have been busy and fully committed to building more and bigger cities (pouring more and more concrete) and building them literally into the heavens with the enormously tall buildings and skyscrapers. 

 

However, Adam man’s efforts to build into the heavens has went far beyond 100 floor buildings.  By the 1960s, Adam man’s focus had changed to one of actually traveling into the heavens.  Thus, the US and Soviet space programs commenced with a view of Adam man actually going into the heavens. 

 

Though the Soviet efforts never really amounted to much, the US efforts have succeeded with man going to the moon (reportedly) and even now planning voyages to Mars and other planets in the solar system. 

 

 

Insanity, Revisited 

 

NASA is now spending $500 million annually in an effort to pave the way for possible Mars explorations in 2010 or later (May 31, 2002, “The Week,” p. 14).  As discussed in prior chapters, people are going crazy buying land in space; planning buses, taxis and other space vehicles; and on and on in terms of trying to exploit space for profit and gain purposes. 

 

Perhaps one of the most pathetic features with this modern obsession over space is that man is busy polluting and defiling the heavens, much in the same way that he has polluted and defiled earth.  It is absolutely incredible what man and so-called science has been doing to the heavens. 

 

 

The Ante-Type of Going to the Heavens 

 

Manifestly, the US space program since 1960 has become the typical fulfillment of Genesis 11:4.  Adam men have been building enormous cities and making every effort to go into the heavens.  Why?  The answer is simple--to make a name of fame for themselves. 

 

Like The HIGHEST chose to say when the ante-type of this exercise happened some 4,500 years ago in the plain of Shinar, “nothing will be restrained from them, which they have imagined to do” (Gen 11:6).  So He intervened and cut short that stupid, ridiculous project. 

 

Will He once more intervene and stop this insanity and madness of man trying to go into the heavens in the 20th-21st centuries?  In Genesis, The ELOHIM confounded their language and scattered them.  What will He do now? 

 

 

Y2K, Revisited 

 

It should be noted that Y2K on December 31, 1999, did not amount to much on earth.  But as noted previously, at least one communications satellite and the entire US intelligence (spy) satellite system developed enormous confusion which took three or more days to unravel. 

 

Again, on January 29, 2000, the entire US intelligence satellite system failed once more for a period of time.  This occurred about the same time that the National Security Agency’s computers also mysteriously failed (discussed on the Art Bell Dreamland program on Jan 30, 2000, by Whitley Strieber and a man named Jim Marrs).  Since both of these failures involved national security, little was said about them. 

 

Also, the Russians reportedly have had enormous recent problems with their satellite warning system (discussed on the Art Bell Coast to Coast AM program on Jan 13, 2000).  It was unclear what the exact problem was with the Russians, but it could be Y2K related.  There may be more troubles in space satellites and probes in the future from this Y2K problem or something else to confound man’s plans for the heavens. 

 

Moreover, there was the situation with the previously cited planetary alignments and various conjunctions in 2000, which interestingly came in conjunction with an expected peak in sunspot and solar flare activity in 2000 and 2002.  Computer language and satellites can very easily be disrupted in some manner.  If so, it could be the great type of the building of the tower into the heavens in ancient Shinar. 

 

Therefore, does YHWH now have a process underway to create and confuse man’s computer language used in his efforts of going into the heavens?  Will some Adamic men (Yisrael) soon be scattered in fulfillment of Moshe’s words?  In terms of the prophecies and especially those which seem to define and date the age end (like Yechezkel), the answer is an assured yes. 

 

For sure, the jig is just about up.  And it started when the 6,000 years of Adam’s misrule was reached in the late 20th century.  YHWH is about to intervene and cut short the stupidity and madness of all of Adam man.  He is preparing to install His Own government on earth. 

 

 

Should Men Do Whatever They Want To Do? 

 

Like the Word says, men decided to do whatever they imagined to do (Gen 11:6).  This is what happened at the tower of Babel.  And manifestly, this is what is happening right now in the age end.  Men sit around and conceive of the possibility of going into the heavens and then proceed to do it (or at least try to do it). 

 

Well, there are a lot of things which men can imagine to do, which simply should not be done.  Even the reality of nature sometimes points this truth out.  Take, for example, the situation with fast moving automobiles and airplanes in the 20th century.  Man imagined them and then built them.  But was this right? 

 

This writer was living in Northeast Washington in early 2000.  The snow pack was still quite heavy in the mountains.  But some of the valleys were beginning to be melted and clear.  The deer would come down to the valleys to try to find food.  Deer are certainly marvelous creations with sharp ears and supposedly excellent eyes.  But they can be awful stupid. 

 

Often, many of them dart very fast out in front of moving vehicles and without even looking.  In fact, it seems that they usually don’t look.  They act blindly to charge across the road very fast, with no apparent concern that they are going in front of a moving car.  Many get injured or killed.  And it isn’t only deer, but all kinds of other animals are killed by moving traffic. 

 

Sometimes, birds get sucked into the big engines of jet aircraft.  And of course, this can cause problems and even crashes.  It seems that they are stupid or impervious to the dangers of airplanes. 

 

So, what is wrong here with animals and birds which simply have no perception of the dangers of moving vehicles and airplanes.  Did The MOST HIGH create life forms which would be slaughtered in the modern Adamic civilization, simply because The CREATOR failed to give them the perception and ability to avoid being killed by man’s technologically advanced transportation means? 

 

In other words, is the problem with the handiwork of The CREATOR in the way He made birds and animals?  Or is it possible that man’s technological development of the various fast moving forms of transportation may be inconsistent and not harmonious with the creation?  In other words, maybe the problem is with the airplanes and cars and not with the birds and animals. 

 

Hence, the issue raised in Genesis 11:6 crystallizes.  Should man do everything he imagines to do?  The fact that he can conceptualize something typically leads him to go ahead and do it and regardless of the consequences.  Man does most things with a could care-less, cavalier attitude.  But is man right on this?  This issue was expanded upon in prior chapters herein on pollution and the environment.  

 

 

One More Note on Duality 

 

The 20th century has seen the world come alive for a lot of people.  Starting with the failure of building the tower into the heavens and lasting until WWI, foreign lands and peoples seemed so far away, so strange, so mysterious, so unknown and in many ways so exciting and enticing. 

 

Even as late as the 1930s and early 1940s, building up to WWII, foreign lands and peoples were something for Hollywood movies and dreams and imaginations.  This writer, as a boy, looked upon these strange lands and peoples with utter fascination.  But after WWII, with the explosion in communications, transportation and technology, the foreign lands became the place next door which almost anyone could visit. 

 

This far away thinking was the background which prevailed in the period following WWI when significant international trade and commerce began to intensify.  By the 1920s and 1930s, US foreign trade had increased appreciably.  Despite the depression in the early 1930s, US trade in the 1930s did accelerate in one primary direction.  Trade with Japan became significant. 

 

Japan was buying scrap metal, minerals and other raw materials to build airplanes and ships.  The US sales of all kinds of scrap metals were astronomical for those days.  The Japanese bought this supposedly junk and melted it down and recast it into vehicles of war.  Many Americans used to laugh at the Japanese.  But then, with Pearl Harbor, the laughter ended. 

 

The Japanese war machine was built, in part, by American exports of scrap metals.  Now, all of this is interesting history.  But what does it mean in terms of today and today’s world here in the early 21st century.  Well, strangely enough, the US build up of Japan in the 1930s has proved to be an ante-type of what has been happening in the late 20th and early 21st centuries. 

 

 

The Chinese 

 

The change in the early 21st century is that America’s most interesting and deadliest trading partner has turned out to be Communist China.  Instead of shipping scrap metals to build airplanes and ships, the US has been shipping advanced nuclear and missile technology to China to build nuclear bombs, intercontinental ballistic rockets and surface to air missiles. 

 

Of course, there is a pay back for this technology going overseas.  It comes back to America in the form of either campaign contributions to Bill Clinton or to fill the greedy pockets of various Amalekite business men for profit and gain purposes.  What the Chinese couldn’t buy, they have stolen.  Does history repeat itself?  Does a cat have a tail?